JP6651150B1 - Game console - Google Patents

Abstract

A game console having a feature in a notification method is provided. A first advantageous gaming state, a second advantageous gaming state, and a third advantageous gaming state capable of notifying operation information, a first advantageous gaming state, a second advantageous gaming state, and a third advantageous gaming state. There is a fourth advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous in reporting operation information than the gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state shifts from the second advantageous gaming state when the count value reaches a second specific value. Possible to stay until the count value reaches a first specific value. The effect mode in the second advantageous game state is different from the effect mode in the third advantageous game state, and the second advantageous game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous game state. When shifting from the fourth advantageous gaming state to a gaming state in which operation information can be notified, the operation shifts to the second advantageous gaming state, and the operating information can be notified after the third advantageous gaming state ends. When the game state shifts to the first game state, the game state shifts to the first advantageous game state. [Selection] Fig. 98

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming table represented by a ball-and-ball game machine (pachinko machine), a torso gaming machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine or a medalless slot machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a gaming table that can be provided with a profit by an operation navigation and is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, see Patent Document 1). On the other hand, in recent years, in order to suppress gambling, a gaming table in which an advantageous state is limited has been recommended. As such a gaming table, for example, it is conceivable to provide an upper limit number of times in an advantageous state and regulate the addition of the number of games immediately before the upper limit number of times.

JP 2005-296354 A

However, in the conventional game console, if the player does not add a rare role and does not perform the addition, it is difficult to know whether it is simply an omission in the lottery or whether the addition is restricted, so if the player feels that the addition is restricted In the game, the subsequent advantageous state becomes a digestive game, and after the advantageous state continues to some extent, the player may not be able to play the game with expectation.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming table having a feature in a notification method.

A game console according to the present invention includes an operation unit, a control unit for shifting to any one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state, and a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. A game console, which is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means, and wherein the advantageous state is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to notification of the operation information (hereinafter, referred to as “operation navigation”). State, wherein the operation navigation is a navigation about a pushing role, comprising a first counter relating to the advantageous state, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (Hereinafter, referred to as a “first count value”) is configured to be updatable, and one of a plurality of end conditions including a first end condition and a second end condition is satisfied. In the advantageous state Et the is configured to transition to the normal state, the first end condition is satisfied possible conditions when the first count is equal to the first specific value, the advantageous condition In, it is configured to be able to transition to any of a plurality of advantageous game states, one of the plurality of advantageous game states is a first advantageous game state, the first advantageous game state, the first The advantageous game state is an advantageous game state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and includes a second counter related to the first advantageous game state. Each time one game is performed in the first advantageous game state, The count value of the second counter (hereinafter, referred to as “second count value”) is configured to be renewable, and in the first advantageous game state, a game that has not been won in the pushing order is performed. Even if the second Count value is configured to be updated, and the first game bet number of game medium is a first number, executable configured a second game bet number of game media is the second number of The second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. One of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as a “first display”), and one of the plurality of types of display. Is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”), and one of the plurality of types of display is the first display. And a specific display different from any of the second displays (hereinafter, referred to as a “third display”). Is a value related to the second count value, and when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, The count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated, and the second display is configured to be able to be displayed in the first game, and in the first advantageous game state, When the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated. In the second game, the third display is configured to be displayable without displaying the second display, and based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state. , Of the game media that the player has Includes a third counter for counting the number, the count value of the advantageous state 1 game in the third every time takes place counter (hereinafter, referred to as "third count value". ) Can be updated, and the second end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value, and the first end condition is satisfied in the advantageous state. No matter which of the game and the second game is executed, the third count value is configured to be updated based on the result of the game, and the plurality of types of display are displayed. One of the displays is a start display of a certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth display”), and the execution of the first game is started in a certain state in the first advantageous game state. In this case, the fourth display is configured to be displayed in the first game, and when the execution of the second game is started in the certain state, the second game is displayed. Is configured so that the fourth display is not displayed. It is the amusement machine according to claim.
Further, the gaming table according to the present invention has an operation means, a game state setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state, and a display capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. Means, and a notifying means capable of notifying operation information of the operating means, wherein the gaming state control means is capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state, and a first counter relating to the advantageous state. , A plurality of counters including a second counter and a third counter, and a plurality of counters including a first bet number and a second bet number less than the first bet number for starting one game. Betting number setting means capable of setting any one of the betting numbers, wherein the advantageous state is more advantageous than the normal state in the notification of the operation information (hereinafter, referred to as “operation navi”). And the operation navigation is In the advantage state, the game with the first bet (hereinafter, referred to as “first game”) is a game with the second bet (hereinafter, “second game”). The game is more advantageous to the player than the game.), And the advantageous game state control means controls the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, referred to as the “first game”) every time one game is played in the advantageous state. The game state setting means is configured to update one of a plurality of end conditions including a first end condition and a second end condition. When the condition is satisfied, the setting of the advantageous state is ended and the normal state can be set.The first end condition is that the first count value is a first specific value. Condition that can be satisfied if The technique state control means can execute control for setting any one of a plurality of advantageous game states including the first advantageous game state in the advantageous state, and the first advantageous game state Is a means capable of executing control for updating the count value of the second counter (hereinafter, referred to as “second count value”) every time one game is played, and the first advantageous game state is In the advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, the second count value can be updated even in the case where a game in which the winning combination has not been won in the first advantageous gaming state is performed. The display means includes, as one of the plurality of types of displays, a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as a “first display”), and the certain value. Display containing an image representing the updated value of ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “second display”. ), A specific display different from any of the first display and the second display (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”), and a start display of a certain effect (hereinafter, “fourth display”). ). The certain value is a value related to the second count value, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the first value is displayed. When the execution of one game is started, both the first count value and the second count value are updated by the advantageous game state control means, and the display value is displayed in the first game. The second display is configured to be able to be displayed by means, and when the execution of the second game is started, the advantageous game state control means controls the first count value and the second count value. The first count out Only the second display is updated, the second display is not displayed by the display means in the second game, and the third display can be displayed. A counter for counting the total number of game media acquired by the player based on the number of media used and the number of game media paid out, wherein the advantageous game state control means is configured to execute each game in the advantageous state. Means for updating the count value of the third counter (hereinafter, referred to as “third count value”). The second end condition is that the third count value is equal to the third count value. The advantageous game state control means is a condition that can be satisfied when the second specific value is reached, and in the case where any of the first game and the second game is executed in the advantageous state. There , Means for executing control for updating the third count value based on the result of the game, wherein the display means executes the first game in a certain state in the first advantageous game state Is started, the fourth display can be displayed in the first game, and when the execution of the second game is started in the certain state, the second game is started. A game table which does not display the fourth display.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming table having a feature in the notification method.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an appearance of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention in a state where a front door is opened. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4A is a view showing an array of symbols applied to each reel of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, developed in a plane. FIG. 4B is a view illustrating a winning line of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the kind of a winning combination (including an active combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in a three-stake betting game. (B) It is a figure which shows the kind of a winning combination (including an active combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-swing game. FIG. 4A is a transition diagram of a game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. 4B is a transition diagram of an AT-based gaming state of the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100. (A) It is a figure showing the lottery table used for the internal lottery process of a winning combination. FIG. 4B is a view illustrating a correct answer operation sequence of the pushing sequence of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is the figure which matched display data and the lighting mode of the number-of-payouts indicator 127. (A) An image of an effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400 is illustrated. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the judge state effect table. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the LMT state effect table. (D) is a diagram showing a modification of the LMT state effect table. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of a main control unit main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. 10B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 9C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. 9A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. 13B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. 9C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. 10D is a flowchart of an image control process of the second sub control unit 500. 11A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of a bet amount setting / start operation accepting process in step S102 in FIG. 15B is a flowchart showing in detail a flow of a high navigation state update process in step S201 of FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of effect state control processing A of step S106 of FIG. 10 in detail. (B) It is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of each game common processing of step S401 in FIG. 15 (a). (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the low navigation state process A of step S404 of FIG.17 (a) in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state processing A of step S405 of FIG.15 (a) in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state common process A of step S801 of FIG. 17 in detail. 18 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of a normal state process A in step S803 of FIG. 17 in detail. 18 is a flowchart showing a detailed flow of a fixed notification state process A of step S805 in FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of an AT1 state process A in step S807 of FIG. 17 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of judgment state processing A of step S809 of FIG. 17 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT2 state processing A of step S811 of FIG. 17 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the retraction state process A of step S813 of FIG. 17 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the instruction information setting process of step S814 of FIG. 17 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of effect state control processing B of step S113 of FIG. 10 in detail. 27 is a flowchart showing a detailed flow of high navigation state processing B in step S1704 of FIG. 26. 28 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of a normal state process B in step S1802 in FIG. 27 in detail. 28 is a flowchart showing the details of a flow of a confirmation notification state process B in step S1804 in FIG. 27. 28 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of AT1 state processing B in step S1806 in FIG. 27 in detail. 28 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of a judgment state process B in step S1808 of FIG. 27 in detail. 28 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of AT2 state processing B in step S1810 in FIG. 27 in detail. 28 is a flowchart showing in detail a flow of a retraction state process B in step S1812 of FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a detailed flow of an LMT state process B in step S1813 of FIG. 27. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state end process of step S114 of FIG. 10 in detail. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of a normal state process A according to a first modification in detail. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of a normal state process A according to Modification 2 in detail. 13 is a flowchart showing a detailed flow of a fixed notification state process A according to a first modification. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a detailed flow of a fixed notification state process A according to a second modification. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a detailed flow of a fixed notification state process A according to a modification 3. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a detailed flow of a fixed notification state process B according to Modification 3. It is a figure which shows the kind of winning combination (including an active combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. (A) is a transition diagram of a gaming state of a main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to a modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. (B), (c) is a transition diagram of a gaming state of an AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to a modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. (A) It is a figure showing the lottery table used for the internal lottery process of a winning combination. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct answer operation | movement order of the pressing order of this embodiment. It is the figure which matched display data and the lighting mode of the number-of-payouts indicator 127. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is a figure corresponding to the main control part main process which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the production state control processing A which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is a figure corresponding to production state control processing A which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG.15 (a). (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of every game common processing which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is a figure corresponding to every game common processing which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG.15 (b). FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a flow of a high navigation state process A according to a modification of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the high navigation state process A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 17. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the processing for effects which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of an effect state control process B according to a modification of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the effect state control process B according to the first embodiment illustrated in FIG. 26. FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of a high navigation state process B according to a modification of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the high navigation state process B according to the first embodiment illustrated in FIG. 27. In the high navigation state, when the production state transitions in the order of AT2 state → judgment state → LMT state (limit state), and then transitions to the normal state of the low navigation state, the counter of the counter when only the three betting game is performed is performed. It is a figure showing an example of an update display. In the high navigation state, when the production state transitions in the order of AT2 state → judge state → LMT state (limit state), and then transitions to the normal state of the low navigation state, both the three-bet game and the two-bet game are performed. It is a figure showing an example of an update display of a counter at the time of performing. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the update display of a counter when a judge effect is not performed by a two-stakes betting game. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the update display of the counter when the judge effect and the ED effect are not performed by the two-page betting game. In the high navigation state, when the effect state shifts from the judge state to the LMT state (limit state) in order, and then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, the ED effect and the freeze effect when only the three-bet game is performed. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of the above. (A) In the high-navigation state, after transitioning from the judge state to the LMT state (limit state) in the order of the staging state and then to the normal state in the low-navigation state, a three-bet game and a two-bet game are performed. It is the figure which showed an example of the ED effect and the freeze effect at the time. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a modification of the setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the setting suggestion effect at the time of continuing the betting game in the judge state of the high navigation state. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd freeze production at the time of playing the three-page betting game. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd freeze effect in the case of playing two betting games in the middle of AT2 state. It is a figure showing an example of the ED effect in the case of playing a three-page bet game. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the ED effect in the case where it shifts to the LMT state after playing the two betting game in the normal state. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the ED effect in the case of continuing the betting game of two in the normal state. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the ED effect performed after a BB game. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the ED effect performed during BB internal winning. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect | action when an interlocking effect | action progresses normally. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect | action when an interlocking effect | action does not progress normally. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect | action when an ED effect | action is started, without an interlocking effect | action progressing normally. (B) It is a figure showing an example of an interlocking production in a case where a two-page bet game was continued in a judge state. It is the figure which showed the linked effect and its modification. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect when a three-betting game was performed when the effect state changed from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production at the time of the production state shifting from AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state, and the two betting game was performed. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification of the flow of the effect at the time of the effect state changing from AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state, and when the three betting game was performed. (B) It is the figure which showed the modification of the flow of the effect at the time of a game state being changed from AT2 state to a judge state in a high navigation state, and a two-game betting game was performed. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the flow of the production which includes the specific indication. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect | action when three games were played in the high navigation state, arrived at the ceiling, and the effected state changed in order of normal state-> fixed notification state-> AT1 state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation when the betting game is performed in the high navigation state, does not reach the ceiling, and the production state is maintained in the normal state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production in the case where the three game and the two bet game were performed in the high navigation state and the ceiling was reached, and the production state transitioned in the order of normal state → confirmation notification state → AT1 state. . It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect at the time of shifting to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling, in which the three-player game and the two-player bet game are performed in the high navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect at the time of shifting to the low navigation state without reaching the ceiling when the three-player game and the two-player bet game are performed in the high navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect when the three-player game and the two-player bet game are performed in the confirmation notification state of the high navigation state, and the promotion counter is not updated. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect when operation navigation is not performed in the fixed notification state of a high navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect when AT1 classification | category is promoted in the fixed notification state of a high navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect when it did not reach the ceiling in the confirmed notification state of the high navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect at the time of reaching the ceiling in the confirmation notification state of a high navigation state. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the ED effect at the time of performing the three-stakes betting game in the LMT state. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the ED effect at the time of playing the two-sheet bet game in the LMT state. FIG. 67 is a view showing a modification of the specific display shown in FIG. 67 (D). It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-1. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-2. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-3. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-4. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-5. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-6. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-7. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-8. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-9. 24A is a flowchart showing the flow of an AT2 state process A according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the AT2 state process A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the lottery table. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of judge state processing B concerning Embodiment 2, and is a figure corresponding to judge state processing B concerning Embodiment 1 shown in said FIG. (B) It is a figure showing an example of AT2 initial number lottery table. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the lottery table. 33 is a flowchart showing a flow of an AT2 state process B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the AT2 state process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 34 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of a retraction state process B according to the second embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the retraction state process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed the transition example of AT state in a high navigation state. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the production | presentation when the production | presentation state changes in the order of AT2 state-> judgment state-> withdrawal state in the high navigation state, and changes to the normal state of the low navigation state. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the production | presentation when the production | presentation state changes in the order of AT2 state-> LMT state in a high navigation state, and changes to the normal state of the low navigation state. FIG. 92 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of an effect when the effect state changes in the order of AT2 state → judgment state → retracted state → AT2 state in the high navigation state, in which the effect described with reference to FIG. The continuation is shown. (B) In the high navigation state, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the LMT state in the order, then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, shifts to the high navigation state again, and the effect state changes from the normal state to the confirmation notification state. FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating a flow of the effect when the transition is made in the order of the AT1 state, and illustrates a continuation of the effect described with reference to FIG. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the notification at the time of the formation of the combination in AT2 state. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the notification at the time of a winning combination in the LMT state. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect at the time of correct | amending AT2 initial number of times. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect at the time of displaying the number of games remaining in the AT2 state. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect at the time of displaying the number of games remaining in the AT2 state. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect when displaying a result after shifting to AT2 state. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect when not displaying a result after completion | finish of AT2 state, and is a figure corresponding to FIG. 95 (a). It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 2-1. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 2-2. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 2-3. FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a state transition of a push button operation, a cross key operation, a closing operation, and a lever operation. FIG. 5A is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of various operations for switching display between a normal screen and a demonstration screen. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating an example of various operations in a case of performing volume adjustment using the setting screen in a time series. FIG. 4C is a diagram showing, in chronological order, an example of various operations in a case where volume adjustment is performed without displaying a setting screen. It is the figure which showed an example of (D), (E) other various operation in time series. It is the figure which showed in time series the character selection operation in the case where the production state changed from the judge state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state. (A) It is the figure which showed Example 5 of the character selection operation in time series. (B) It is the figure which showed Example 6 of the character selection operation in time series. (A) It is the figure which showed Example 6 of the character selection operation in time series. (B) It is the figure which showed Example 7 of the character selection operation in time series. (C) It is the figure which showed Example 8 of the character selection operation in time series. (A) is a diagram showing a modification 1 of the character selection operation in chronological order. FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a modification 2 of the character selection operation in chronological order. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 3-1. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 3-2.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment 1]
The slot machine of the present embodiment has a predetermined number of game media inserted therein, and a plurality of reels each provided with a plurality of types of symbols start rotating by receiving a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, it is determined by lottery whether the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins, and the plurality of reels individually stop rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the conditions determined by the combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out if it does not match, and the game medium is ended if it does not match. It is a game console that advances a series of games that end without payout.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is equivalent to an example of a game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101, and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 101. . Inside the center of the main body 101, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed, and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are driven to rotate by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, each symbol is printed on a belt-shaped member at an equal interval in an appropriate number, and this belt-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to constitute each of the reels 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in a vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition, as such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited thereto.

  On the back of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. An optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112 inside the slot machine 100. The light projecting unit of this optical sensor is provided. A light-shielding piece having a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the light-receiving section and the light-receiving section. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the activated pay line 114.

  The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in a later-described winning combination internal lottery, or that a bonus game is being performed. It is a lamp to inform. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up after the bonus notification for notifying the determination of the bonus until the bonus game ends. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that a player can insert a game medal. The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (there is no need to insert medals) when the player has won a re-game which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three sheets are inserted one by one, two sheets are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three sheets are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX (max) bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and, when a specified number of medals have been inserted, notifies that the game can be started. The lamp 121 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for a player to insert medals when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and insertion means both. is there.

  The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various kinds of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout amount indicator 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are configured by 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 according to the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information about a stop operation (for example, the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

  The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the start lever 135 is operated by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 whose rotation has been started by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

  Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel to be subjected to a second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel to be subjected to a third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

  Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation sequence in which the first stop reel is set to the left reel 110 as a stop operation is referred to as “forward push operation sequence” or simply “forward push”. This is referred to as "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. When the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that is turned on when the AT-based game state of the main control unit 300 is in a high navigation state described later. The player can recognize that the vehicle is in the high navigation state from the lighting state of the high navigation state lamp 190.

  The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals bet, and discharging the medals from the medal payout opening 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying a model name and pasting various certification stamps is provided. A medal payout slot 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162.

  The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on each of the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 160 is provided above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided above the effect device 160. The rendering device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 including two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (game device). Side).

  The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information about a stop operation (for example, the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

  It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured to display various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is formed in a rectangular shape, and the entirety thereof is configured to be visually recognizable by a player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the periphery of the display screen may be hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen may appear irregular. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

  Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 notify predetermined information by causing the lamp to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, the predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine of full liquid crystal, an area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, the expression “lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190” is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by an upper surface plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower surface plate 264, and a back plate 242, and is open to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 containing a main control board is disposed at a position not overlapping with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Below the three reels 110 to 112 are arranged. A first sub-control board storage accommodating a first sub-control board constituting a first sub-controller therein is provided on the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260. A case 220 is provided. On the right side plate 260, an external centralized terminal plate 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached.

  On the lower surface plate 264, a medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals stored in a bucket) is provided. Above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112, a power supply board is provided. A power supply 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when closed.

  The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC, converts the AC power into a predetermined voltage, and converts the AC power into a predetermined voltage. The control unit supplies each device. Furthermore, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. I have.

  A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply 252 is provided with a power cord connecting portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. I have.

  The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 157, an effect device 160 and an effect control board (not shown) for controlling the effect device 160. (Omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. A medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like into the medal tray 161 are provided below the liquid crystal display device 157. I have. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, a circuit configuration of a control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control units of the slot machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 for controlling the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. , And a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-controller 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 for controlling the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery of a winning combination, and reel stop. A ROM 306 for storing a position and the like, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. Then, an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 executes monitoring of each sensor and the like and transmission of a drive pulse in response to the interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 × 47/8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that varies a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and is activated when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 includes a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal). When the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (main control unit main processing described later). To start).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 sends various sensors 318 (a bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, a bet button 132 sensor, and a medal insertion slot 141 at every interruption time). A medal reception sensor for a medal, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a settlement button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, an index sensor for the reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, and the like are monitored.

  When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in the register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

  Two medal reception sensors are provided in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are provided inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect an operation of the stop button by the player.

  A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are provided on each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and insert a medal electronically stored in the RAM 308 as an insertion medal for a game. Detect the input operation in case. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

  The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes, L Become a level. Upon detecting this signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

  The main control unit 300 is provided in a drive circuit 322 for driving a stepping motor provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving a solenoid provided in a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and provided in the medal payout device 180. A driving circuit 326 for driving the motor, and various lamps 336 (a winning line display lamp 120, a game medal insertion lamp 124, a re-game lamp 122, a game medal insertion lamp 129, a game start lamp 121, a stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display 126, the payout number display 127, and the high navigation state lamp 190) is provided.

  An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302. The main control unit 300 transmits a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, a game state) is output. Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 determines that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). When the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub-control unit 400. A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface, and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. I have. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various displays, and the like are stored. Provided.

  The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via a data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

  The first sub-controller 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 according to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing audio data is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data obtained from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422. The drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp via an input / output interface). 123 etc.) are connected.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is connected to the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404.

  Further, the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interruption time.

  The CPU 404 sends and receives signals to and from the second sub control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and controls the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 includes a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The CPU 504 transmits the data for frequency division stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of the interrupt request.

  The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the VDP 516 is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Symbol array>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4A, a description will be given of a symbol arrangement performed on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an array of symbols applied to each of the reels (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, and the right reel 112) in a flatly developed manner.

  On each of the reels 110 to 112, a plurality of types (eight types in this embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the drawing are arranged by a predetermined number of frames (in this embodiment, 20 frames of numbers 0 to 19). Also, numbers 0 to 19 shown on the left end of the drawing are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the frame of the left reel 110 with the number 19 is “Bell symbol”, the frame of the middle reel 111 with the number 19 is “blank symbol”, and the frame of the right reel 112 with the number 18 is “Seven 2”. Symbol "is arranged. Hereinafter, the “seven 1 design” may be referred to as “blue 7 (design)”, and the “seven 2 design” may be referred to as “red 7 (design)”.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4B is a view illustrating a winning line of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 2). The symbol to be displayed is the middle symbol of the left reel, and the symbol displayed in the lower portion of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is the lower symbol of the left reel, and the upper portion of the middle reel 111 (4 shown in the drawing). , The symbol displayed at the symbol position 4) is the upper symbol of the middle reel, and the symbol displayed at the middle of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5) is the middle symbol of the middle reel. The symbol displayed on the lower part of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is displayed on the lower part of the middle reel and the upper part of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7). Upper right reel on the displayed symbol The symbol displayed on the middle of the pattern and the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8) is the symbol in the middle of the right reel and the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 9). ) Is referred to as a lower right symbol of the right reel, and three symbols in each of the reels 110 to 112 are vertically displayed on each of the reels 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113, for a total of nine symbols. .

  In the present embodiment, one winning line 114 of a middle winning line L1 including a left reel middle symbol (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle symbol (symbol position 5), and a right reel middle symbol (symbol position 8) is provided. ing. The winning line 114 is a line set at a stop position of a symbol that can be visually recognized through the reel window 113, and corresponds to a winning combination described later with reference to FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b). This is a line for determining whether a combination is displayed. FIG. 4B shows a middle winning line L1. The activated pay line (hereinafter may be simply referred to as an “active line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

  The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is capable of playing a game of three or two bets. When the number of inserted medals is less than two, no winning line is activated, and the number of medals is three or two. The winning line L1 is activated when a bet is made. When the pay line is activated, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135.

  Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, a downward winning line composed of an upper left reel design, a middle reel middle design, and a right reel lower design, and a left reel lower design, a middle reel middle design, and a right reel upper design are configured. A total of three pay-up pay lines may be set as the effective pay lines 114, or a number of pay lines according to the number of bets may be set as the effective pay lines 114.

<Type of winning combinations>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7A is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including the winning combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the three-bet game. (B) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two-page betting game.

  The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special combination (special combination 1, special combination 2), a general combination (re-gaming combination 1 to re-combination 13 and small combination 1 to small combination 5). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and may be arbitrarily adopted.

  Of the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. In addition, the re-gaming combination 1 to the re-gaming combination 13 are combinations that enable re-gaming without inserting new medals. These winning combinations may be referred to as “operators”. Further, the “winning” in the present embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an actor without a medal payout (without a medal payout) is displayed on the activated line. The winning of the special combination 2 and the replaying combinations 1 to 13 is included.

  The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combinations) that shift to a special game state upon winning. In this example, the special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only in a three-stake game, and the special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only in a two-stake game. It should be noted that no medal is paid out for winning the role itself. In the corresponding symbol combination, the special combination 1 (BB1) is “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2”, and the special combination 2 (BB2) is “BAR-BAR-Seven 1”.

  When the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). If the flag is set to ON by internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to a special internal winning state of the special combination 1 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). In addition, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 2, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the internal winning state of the special combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). .

  This flag is kept on until the internally won combination is won, and the internally won combination is easily won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if a special combination 1 or a special combination 2 does not win the special combination in the game, the special combination will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, special When the role 1 is internally won, the symbol combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)" is in a state in which it is easy to win. The special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

  The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of coins are paid out (110 in this example, winning in BB1 is 110, and winning in BB2 is 55), a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state is referred to as RT1). There is). The special game state (RT4) and the re-game low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

  The “re-gaming role (re-gaming role 1 to re-gaming role 13)” is a prize-winning role (operating role) capable of performing a game without a medal (game medium) being inserted in the next game by winning. No medals will be paid out. In addition, the corresponding symbol combination is “replay-replay-replay” for replay 1 (normal replay), “seven 1-seven 1-seven 1” for replay 2 (production replay 1), and replay 3 (Direction replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 5, such as "Seven 1-Seven 2-Seven 1".

  "Small win (small win 1 to small win 5)" is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is "ANY-Cherry-ANY" for small win 1 (Cherry), The role 2 (watermelon 1) is "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" or the like, as shown in FIG. Also, the corresponding payout number is as shown in FIG. In the case of “ANY-Cherry-ANY”, the symbol on the middle reel 111 may be “Cherry”, and the symbols on the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols.

<Reel stop control>
Next, an outline of stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. The reel stop control is performed by selecting one of a plurality of predetermined reel stop control data based on a predetermined condition (for example, a result of an internal lottery process of a winning combination described later), and stopping the selected reel stop. This is performed based on the control data.

  In the present embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. The pull-in control means that the stop positions of the reels 110 to 112 are shifted within a certain number of frames (the number of symbols) (a maximum of four frames in this case) after the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main controller 300. Each reel stop data includes an allowance control that allows a predetermined combination of winning combinations to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display any combination of winning combinations on the winning line. , Are roughly divided into

  Examples of the permissible control are performed, for example, when a certain winning combination is internally won, or when a special combination is internally won (flag is being carried over), and the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139. Is controlled so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed together within the range of the number of frames even if the number of frames is poor. However, since it is only "permissible", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

  For example, when a small winning combination 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon symbol is arranged beyond four frames, and if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not appropriate, the watermelon symbol is a winning line. Do not stop at

  However, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, there may be a case where 100% are aligned. For example, since the arrangement interval of the replay symbols corresponding to the replaying game 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of four frames, if the replaying game 1 is internally won, a 100% prize will be won regardless of the timing.

  On the other hand, an example in which the prohibition control is performed is, for example, a case where the internal lottery result is lost and the special winning is not being internally won (flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 Even if the number of frames is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of the winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the number of frames.

<Type of game state>
Next, the type and transition of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 6A is a transition diagram of a game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

  The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a special role 1 internal winning state (RT2) in the replay low probability state (RT1), a high replay probability state, and a special role 2 internal winning in the replay high probability state. There is a state (RT3) and a special game state (RT4). In the present embodiment, the game state roughly divided into the four is referred to as an RT-based game state. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to a so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter, referred to as an AT-based game state), and according to the AT-based game state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub-control unit 400 sets a game state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Note that the replay low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability that the condition device related to the replay is operating does not change (default state), a special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), a special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) and the special game state (RT4) are also states in which the probability that the condition device related to the replaying game will operate fluctuates from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 7A is a diagram showing a lottery table used in the internal lottery process of the winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (game state of the RT system), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination.

  The internal winning probability of a winning combination in each game state described below is calculated based on random data obtained from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306 by obtaining numerical data corresponding to the range of the random drawing data associated with each winning combination at the time of the internal random drawing. It is determined by a value obtained by dividing by numerical data (for example, 65535) in a numerical value range. For example, in the replay low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small win 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small win 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≒ 0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each character range and loss are associated with each numerical range.

  The random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is determined to be a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to which combination, and the internal lottery combination is determined. This lottery data is provided with settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probabilities of at least one role are different, and a game store attendant or the like can arbitrarily select and set any one of the set values. Note that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this probability.

  Hereinafter, the gaming state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Re-game low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest (unfavorable to the player) among other game states (for example, game states excluding the special game state), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also. In the replay low probability state, a winning combination to be internally won is randomly selected with reference to a lottery table in a row of “RT1” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A.

  The winning combinations that are internally won in the re-game low probability state include special combination 1 (conditional device No. 1, only 3-gaming game), special combination 2 (not shown, 2-gaming game only), re-gaming combination 1 ( Conditioning device No. 2), replaying roles 2, 4 to 10 (conditioning device No. 3), replaying roles 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13 (conditioning device No. 4), small role 1 to small There is role 5 (conditioning device Nos. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. In addition, the case where the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped in the winning line may be referred to as “losing”. In addition, the fact that the player did not win the winning combination may be expressed as “the winner has been lost”.

  Here, the “re-gaming roles 2, 4 to 10” are re-gaming roles 2, re-gaming roles 4, re-gaming roles 5, re-gaming roles 6, re-gaming roles 7, re-gaming roles 8, and re-gaming roles 9. , And the replaying player 10 are internally won at the same time. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the player's operation sequence. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the correct operation sequence that is a predetermined operation sequence (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by pressing the key in the reverse direction), the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination 2 is changed. It is displayed on the winning line, otherwise, in accordance with the stop operation timing of each of the reels 110 to 112, the replaying role 4, the replaying role 5, the replaying role 6, the replaying role 7, the replaying role A symbol combination corresponding to any of the 8, 8, 9 and 10, is displayed on the winning line. It should be noted that a winning combination determined by the operation order, such as the “re-playing combinations 2, 4 to 10”, may be referred to as a “pushing combination”.

  Also, “re-games 3, 4, 6, 8, 10-13” are re-games 3, re-games 4, re-games 6, re-games 8, re-games 10, and re-games 11 , Re-gaming role 12, and re-gaming role 13 are simultaneously internally won. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the player's operation sequence. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the correct operation order that is a predetermined operation order (in this example, when the stop operation is performed by the reverse push), the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination 3 is changed. It is displayed on the winning line, and in other cases, the re-gaming role 4, the re-gaming role 6, the re-gaming role 8, the re-gaming role 10, the re-gaming role in accordance with the stop operation timing of each of the reels 110 to 112. A symbol combination corresponding to any one of 11, the re-game combination 12, and the re-game combination 13 is displayed on the winning line.

  When "Small win 4" is internally won, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to Small win 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the operation order of the player (FIG. 7 ( a) See remarks). More specifically, when a stop operation is performed in accordance with a correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the pay line, and 11 medals are paid out ( Bell prize). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the correct answer operation order, "bell-bell-bell" is not displayed on the pay line (losing).

  Note that “Small win 4” is composed of “Small win 4a” and “Small win 4b”, and when “Small win 4a” is internally won, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is performed according to the player's operation order. Is displayed on the winning line, while “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order when “Small role 4b” is internally won. You may comprise so that it may be.

  Here, the operation sequence of the correct answer of “Small win 4” will be described in detail with reference to FIG. "Small role 4" is exactly six of "Small role 4LCR", "Small role 4LRC", "Small role 4CLR", "Small role 4CRL", "Small role 4RLC", and "Small role 4RCL" The operation order of the correct answer is assigned to each of the subdivided "small wins 4". The range of the lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small wins 4" is the same.

  For example, when "Small win 4" is internally won for "Small win 4 LCR", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is a correct operation, and the other stop operations are incorrect operations. In the case where “Small win 4” is internally won as “Small win 4 CRL”, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation.

  FIG. 6A shows that, when the special combination 1 is internally won (when the condition (A) is satisfied), a transition is made to a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later. When the special combination 2 is internally won (when the condition (B) is satisfied), the state shifts to a special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as “special role internal winning state”) are the replay low probability state (RT1). ) Is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of the replaying role is higher than that of the special winning combination, and the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON. By doing so, it is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

  In the special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), a winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column of “RT2” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In RT3), a winning combination to be internally won is randomly selected with reference to a lottery table in a row of "RT3" on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A. Winning roles that are internally won in the special role internal winning state include replaying role 1, replaying roles 2, 4 to 10, replaying roles 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, and small role 1 to small role 4. There is. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. Further, in FIG. 6 (a), when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed in the special combination internal winning state (when the condition (C) is satisfied), a special game described later is performed. A transition to the state (RT4) is shown.

<Special gaming state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is a game state most advantageous to the player among all the game states. In the special game state, a winning combination to be internally won is randomly selected with reference to a lottery table in a row of “RT4” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. 7A. In the special game state, the winning combination that is internally won is only the small combination 5. If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  FIG. 6A shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the state shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, when the game shifts to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, when the payout of more than 110 medals is performed, the re-game low probability state (RT1) Move to Further, when the game shifts to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 2, when the payout of more than 55 medals is performed, the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). .

  In the present embodiment, the special game state ends when a predetermined number of payouts are executed. For example, the special game state ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times ( The game may end when a prize has been won (for example, eight times) or when a predetermined number of games (for example, six times) have been played. That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 6A is not limited to this example.

<Transition of AT game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6B, an AT-based game state will be described. FIG. 6B is a transition diagram of an AT-based gaming state of the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100.

  As shown in the figure, the AT-type gaming state is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which the operation navigation is more likely to be executed than the low navigation state, and is also called an AT mode. Here, the operation navigator is internally won for the pushing order (in this example, replaying roles 2, 4 to 10, replaying roles 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13, or small role 4). In this case, it refers to an effect that notifies the correct operation sequence. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the contents of the stop operation for acquiring the medals, the contents of the stop operation for shifting to the advantageous game state, or maintaining the advantageous game state.

  Here, the operation navigation will be described with reference to FIGS. 7B and 8. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed using the payout number display 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 7B is a view for explaining the correct answer operation sequence of the pushing sequence of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 8 associates the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. FIG.

  For example, the display data 01 is data indicating a stop operation of setting the first stop reel to the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data indicating a stop operation of setting the first stop reel to the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is set. , Data indicating a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the right reel 112.

  Therefore, in the AT mode, in the case where “re-gaming combination 2, 4 to 10” or “re-gaming combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13” is internally won, the first stop reel is set to the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, the display data 03 indicating that the first stop operation is on the right is selected, the lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03 is displayed on the payout number display 127, and the effect image display is performed. On the device 157, an image indicating that the first stop reel is the right reel 112 (for example, a character “−1”) is displayed.

  The display data 04 is data indicating a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The display data 05 is the first stop reel. Is a left reel 110, the second stop reel is a right reel 112, and the third stop reel is a middle reel 111. Data indicating a stop operation, and display data 06, the first stop reel is a middle reel 111, and the second stop reel is a The data indicating the stop operation of setting the left reel 110, the third stop reel to the right reel 112, and the display data 07 are as follows: the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel. The display data 08 indicating the stop operation with the reel 110 as the first reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third reel is the third reel. The data indicating the stop operation of setting the stop reel to the middle reel 112 and the display data 09 include the stop operation of setting the first stop reel to the right reel 112, setting the second stop reel to the middle reel 111, and setting the third stop reel to the left reel 110. It is data that suggests.

  Therefore, when the small win 4CLR of “small win 4” is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, display data 06 indicating that the first stop operation is middle, the second stop operation is left, and the third stop operation is right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the display data 06. And the effect image display device 157 suggests that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. (For example, the character “213”) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to determine whether the internal winning combination is the replaying combination or the small combination 4 based on the lighting mode of the payout number indicator 127. However, for example, the stop operation of the correct answer of the small combination 4 may be set to three choices like the replay combination, and the small combination 4 may be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. Further, the stop operation of the correct answer of the re-gaming combination may be set to six choices like the small combination 4, and the re-gaming combination may be notified using the display data 04 to 09. Also in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

  In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is a state where the execution probability of the operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is a state where the execution probability of the operation navigation is higher than the low navigation state. Is not executed, and the high navigation state may be the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When a stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation content of the operation navigation, an advantageous result is provided to the player, and thus the high navigation state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the advantage is, specifically, the total number of game media paid out by the gaming table with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as a bet amount when playing the game for a predetermined period. A ratio, a so-called payout rate (payout rate).

  In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than the loss is won), the state shifts to the normal state of the high navigation state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 6 (c), for example, the state shifts in the order of the fixed notification state → the AT1 state → the judge state, and shifts from the judge state to the normal game state or the AT2 state via the retraction state. There are a route and a route for directly shifting from the judge state to the AT2 state. In this embodiment, when the transition to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is determined, a predetermined number (for example, 50 games) of the number of games in the AT mode (hereinafter referred to as the number of AT games) is given. As will be described later in detail, when a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<State transition of AT system>
FIG. 6 (b) is a diagram illustrating an effect state in each of the AT-based game states. As shown in FIG. 6B, each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called an effect state. Specifically, the effect state in the low navigation state is a normal state, and the effect state in the high navigation state includes a normal state, a confirmation notification state, a judge state, a retraction state, an AT1, a AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. . The AT1, AT2, and LMT (limit) states are states in which the number of payouts increases in principle.

  Here, the limit state means, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, an effect state from the 981th game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981th game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). May not be in the limit state, but this case will be described later). In the present embodiment, when the remaining high-navigation state is 20 games or less, an ending effect (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an “ED effect”) indicating the end of the high-navigation state is executed.

<Direction table>
Next, an effect table provided in the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9A illustrates an image of the effect table provided in the first sub control unit 400. The storage means (for example, the ROM 406 and the RAM 408 shown in FIG. 3) of the first sub-control unit 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state.

  In the command processing of the first sub-controller main processing described later (step S3604), the first sub-controller 400 produces effect information (for example, an effect state, a high navigation state counter, and the like) included in the command received from the main controller 300. An effect state counter or the like is acquired, and in the subsequent effect control process (step S3605), an effect corresponding to the effect state counter and the like is performed with reference to an effect table corresponding to the effect state and the like. For example, when the current effect state is the AT1 state, processing such as reading effect data for executing the later-described AT1 effect from the ROM 406 with reference to the effect table (AT1 state effect table) corresponding to the AT1 state is performed. When the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  If the current effect state is the judge state, processing such as reading effect data for executing a judge effect described later from the ROM 406 with reference to an effect table (judgment state effect table) corresponding to the judge state is performed. When the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating an example of a judge state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the judge state, the first sub control unit 400 refers to, for example, a judge state effect table as illustrated in FIG. Judge effects corresponding to points and effect state counters are performed.

  Specifically, when effect control is performed according to the judge state effect table shown in FIG. 9B and (1), when the point is 1, the enemy character is changed from A → A → A → B (the expected degree is A A judge effect of changing in the order of <B) is performed, and when the point is 2, a judge effect of changing the enemy character in the order of A → A → B → B is performed. When effect control is performed according to the judge state effect table shown in FIGS. 9B and 9B, when the effect state counter value is N (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N), the effect state is changed to D1. Judgment effect is performed in the order of −1 → D2-1 → D3-1 →... When the value of the effect state counter is N−1 (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N−1), the effect mode is changed. A judge effect of changing in the order of D1-2 → D2-2 → D3-2 →.

  When the current effect state is the LMT state, processing such as reading effect data for executing an LMT effect described later from the ROM 406 with reference to an effect table (LMT state effect table) corresponding to the LMT state is performed. When the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  FIG. 9C shows an example of the LMT state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a corresponding opportunity (a production start condition, an end condition, and the like) has arrived, and when an opportunity has come, an effect corresponding to the counter is performed.

  Specifically, when effect control is performed according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIG. 9C and (1), the value of the effect state counter is 1 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1), and the start lever 135 is set. When a press operation (rebar-on) is received, a lottery table for setting suggestion effect A shown in FIGS. 9C and 2B is used to select from among a plurality of types of effects A1 to A3 according to the current setting value. Then, a process is performed such as selecting a predetermined effect, reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406, and executing setting suggestion effect A (for example, displaying a character image).

  Further, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is received, the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect B shown in FIGS. From among a plurality of types of effects B1 to B10, a predetermined effect is selected in accordance with the current setting value, and effects such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 are performed. (For example, the background image of the end screen).

  In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the case of performing a control for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying a subsequent scene) in an interlocking effect at the time of a two-betting game, the main controller 300 performs an effect state. Since the value of the counter is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continuously displays the scene corresponding to the same value of the effect state counter. Note that a method of controlling to display a specific scene continuously (not to display the subsequent scene) in the linked effect is not limited to this example. For example, the main control unit 300 may control the first sub-control unit 400 You may be comprised so that the command for displaying the following scene in an effect may not be transmitted.

  Note that the production mode, type, determination method, and the like of the setting suggestion production are not limited to this example. For example, as shown in FIG. 9D, according to the current production state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state). Thus, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is larger, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher when the effect state counter is larger than when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is lower.

<Operation of slot machine>
Based on the above features, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control section main processing.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 10 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of inhibition of interrupt, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, permission of operation to the WDT 314, and initial setting Set values, etc.

  In step S102, a bet amount setting / start operation accepting process (described in detail later) is executed. Here, the presence / absence of insertion of a medal is checked, and preparation for transmission of an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted is performed. In the case where the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, the number of inserted medals is determined, and a pay line determination process is performed to determine an effective pay line.

  In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained, and a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, a winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read in accordance with the current gaming state, an internal lottery is performed by using this table and the obtained random number value, and the result of the internal lottery is shown. The preparation for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub control unit 400 is performed. As a result of the internal lottery, when one of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag of the winning combination is turned on.

  In step S105, reel stop data selection processing for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery processing. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main controller 300. In step S105, preparation is made to transmit a reel stop data command including information on the selected reel stop data to the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S106, effect control processing A (to be described in detail later) relating to control of the AT-based gaming state is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, the effect processing is executed. In this effect processing, control of a freeze effect is performed.

  Here, the freeze effect is an effect that makes the originally intended effect seem to have been interrupted on the way, an effect that makes the slot machine seem to have stopped responding, and the like. Furthermore, for light emission, for example, the stop of the change of the lighting mode is called freeze, for sound output, for example, the same sound is continuously output forever is called freeze, and for operation, for example, the operation is performed in the middle. Stopping may be referred to as a freeze.

  In step S108, a reel rotation start process is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110 to 112.

  In step S109, a reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control processing, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be received. When any one of the stop buttons is pressed, a stop table of reel stop data is set to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. With reference to this, any one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. When all the reels 110 to 112 stop, the process proceeds to step S110. In step S109, a stop button accepting command for the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been stopped for each stop operation (specifically, a stop button accepting 1 command for the first stop operation, a second stop operation , A stop button reception 2 command for the third stop operation, and a stop button reception 3 command for the third stop operation) are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Stop command for the stop position of the first stop reel (specifically, a reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, a reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, and a reel stop command for the third stop operation). 3) to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S110, a winning determination process for performing a winning determination is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated prize line, it is determined that a small part 3 (Bell) has been won. In this step S110, preparations are made to transmit a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S111, a medal giving process is performed. In the medal awarding process, if any winning combination with payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

  In step S112, a game state control process is performed. In the game state control processing, processing relating to transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is transitioned when the start condition or the end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current game state of the RT system.

  In step S113, an effect control process B (to be described in detail later) relating to control of the gaming state of the AT system is executed. In step S114, a high navigation state end process (to be described in detail later) relating to the end of the high navigation state is executed.

  Thus, one game is completed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S102 to repeat the above-described processing, whereby the game proceeds. The various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in a command setting transmission process (step S2006 in FIG. 11) of a main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once about every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by the timer interrupt signal. The process starts at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S2001, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S2002, the WDT 314 is periodically (once) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (in order not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once about every 2 ms which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S2003, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the detection signals are partitioned in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

  In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and a process according to the interrupt status is executed. In step S2005, a timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in units of time.

  In step S2006, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300, based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and the command type is included in the output schedule information. The effect control contents can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S2007, an external output signal setting process is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S2008, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S2003, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read, and the presence or absence of an error relating to a medal insertion abnormality and a medal payout abnormality is monitored. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker in which a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various seven-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state.

  In step S2009, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low-voltage signal is on (when the power-off is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011. If the low-voltage signal is off (the power-off is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

  In step S2010, various processes for ending the timer interrupt end process are performed. In the timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S2001 are set in the original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

<Process of First Sub Control Unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the main processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S3001. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this processing, an area for storing internal winning information that is information indicating a result of an internal winning and an area for storing RT update information that is information indicating a gaming state are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

  In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S3004, a command process, which is a process corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

  In step S3005, effect control processing is performed. Here, the effect preparation is performed in accordance with the effect reservation information in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading out the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing update processing of the effect data when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if the effect data read in step S3005 includes a command to the sound source IC 418, the command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S3007, a lamp control process is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, when the effect data read in step S3005 includes a command to various lamps 420, the command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S3008, a shutter control process is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if the effect data read in step S3005 includes a command to the shutter 163, the command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S3009, an information output process for setting to transmit a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result in step S3005 is performed. For example, if the effect data read in step S3005 includes a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, a setting for outputting this control command is performed, and the process returns to step S3002.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of

  In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 12A, and the original value is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S3202, transmission of the command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S3009, updating of the effect random number value, and the like are performed.

<Process of Second Sub-Control Unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 13B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S4001 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S4001. In this initialization processing, input / output port initialization, storage area initialization processing in the RAM 508, storage area initialization processing in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

  In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S4005, effect control processing is performed. More specifically, if there is a new command in step S4004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control on a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, it also includes a process of reading other effect data from the ROM 506, and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S4006, image control processing (to be described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S4005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S4005, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control relating to a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to the step S4002.

  Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-controller 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of

  In step S4201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-controller main processing shown in FIG. 13A, and the original value is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S4202, update processing of the effect random number is performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S4006 in the main process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of the image control process.

  In step S4301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 536. Thereby, one frame image stored in the display area not specified as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table and the like. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S4302, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S4303; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

  In step S4303, parameters are set based on the rendering scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 obtains information on the image data constituting the display image (the coordinate axes and the image size of the VRAM 536). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transmittance, etc.) to the VDP 534. The VDP 534 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S4304, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S4305, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 534 based on the image drawing end. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S5306; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal has been input. Wait for is entered.

  In step S4306, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Betting number setting / start operation acceptance processing>
Next, the bet amount setting / start operation accepting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the bet amount setting / start operation accepting process in step S102 of FIG.

  In step S201, in a state in which medals can be inserted before the start lever operation, a high navigation state update process (to be described in detail later) relating to a transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state and updating of the high navigation state is executed.

  In step S202, other bet amount setting / start operation acceptance processing is executed. That is, the number of bets is set, and it is determined whether the start lever 135 has been operated.

<High navigation state update processing>
Next, the high navigation state update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state update processing in step S201 of FIG. 14A.

  In step S301, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state counter> 0. If the high-navigation state counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S302; otherwise, the high-navigation state update process ends. In step S302, the value of the high navigation state counter is decremented by one.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. The high navigation state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the AT system is in the high navigation state. When it is on, it indicates the high navigation state, and when it is off, it indicates the low navigation state. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304; otherwise, the high navigation state update processing ends.

  In step S304, the high navigation state flag is turned on. In the present embodiment, an initial value (1000 in this example) is set in the high navigation state counter in a game in which the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state is determined (see step S703 in FIG. 16B described later). When the start lever of the next game is operated, the state shifts to the high navigation state. When the high navigation state flag is turned on, the high navigation state lamp 190 starts lighting.

<Effect state control processing A>
Next, the effect state control processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the effect state control processing A in step S106 in FIG.

  In step S401, each game common process (described in detail later) is executed. In step S402, it is determined whether the processing prohibition flag is off. The processing prohibition flag is a flag indicating whether or not to execute processing related to the high navigation state in the high navigation state. When the processing prohibition flag is off, the game is capable of executing the processing related to the high navigation state. When the processing prohibition flag is on, it indicates that the game does not execute the processing related to the high navigation state. If the process prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S403; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S406 if the process prohibition flag is on.

  In step S403, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S404. If the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, on, the process proceeds to step S405.

  In step S404, since the vehicle is in the low navigation state, low navigation state processing A (described in detail later) is executed. In step S405, since the vehicle is in the high navigation state, the high navigation state processing A (described in detail later) is executed. In step S406, other effect state control processing A is executed.

  In the effect state control processing A of the present embodiment, a processing prohibition flag is provided, and only when the processing prohibition flag is off, the low navigation state processing A or the high navigation state processing A is executed. You may. In this case, the low navigation state processing A or the high navigation state processing A is always executed in the effect state control processing A.

<Every game common processing>
Next, the common game processing for each game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of each game common process in step S401 of FIG. 15A.

  In step S501, it is determined whether a condition for executing the high navigation state related process is satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is that the game is a recommended number game (in this example, a three-bet game). It should be noted that the recommended number game is not limited to the three game, and the recommended number game may be different for each state of the slot machine. As a result of the determination in step S501, if the condition for executing the high-navigation state-related processing is satisfied (for example, the game is a three-bet game), the process proceeds to step S502; If the game is a two-page bet game), the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S502, the processing prohibition flag is turned off. In step S503, the processing prohibition flag is turned on. In step S504, other common game processing is executed.

<Low navigation state processing A>
Next, the common game processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing the detailed flow of the low navigation state process A in step S404 of FIG. 15A.

  In step S601, a high navigation state transition process (to be described in detail later) for determining whether to transition to the high navigation state is executed. In step S602, other low navigation state processing A is executed.

<High navigation state transition processing>
Next, the high navigation state transition processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state transition process in step S601 of FIG. 16A.

  In step S701, high navigation state transition determination is performed. In the high-navi state transition determination, when the high-navi state transition condition is satisfied (in this example, when a winning combination other than the losing is won in the winning combination internal lottery process), it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, and It is decided to shift from the game to the high navigation state.

  In step S702, it is determined whether or not the transition to the high navigation state has been determined. If the determination is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S703; otherwise, the high navigation state transition processing ends.

  In step S703, an initial value (1000 in this example) is set in the high navigation state counter. It is needless to say that the initial value of the high navigation state counter is not limited to 1000, but may be 1500, for example. In step S705, other high navigation state transition processing is executed. Here, the number of games of various games to be executed after shifting to the high navigation state is set, for example, and an initial value (700 in this example) is set as the value of the ceiling counter.

  In step S701, in the high-navigation state transition determination, the transition to the high-navigation state is determined when a winning combination other than the loss is won. However, the high-navigation transition condition is not limited to this. The transition to the high navigation state may be determined based on the result of the lottery used, or the lottery is performed using the lottery value provided for each winning combination, and the transition to the high navigation state is performed based on the result of the lottery. May be determined.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, the high navigation state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state process A in step S405 in FIG.
In step S801, a high navigation state common process (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S802, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a normal state. If it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S803, and if not, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, normal state processing A (described in detail later) is executed. As will be described in detail later, in the normal state processing A, for example, a counter for the number of games in the effect state (a precursor state) is subtracted. In addition, effect setting according to the result of the winning combination internal lottery process is performed for the game.

  In step S804, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a confirmed notification state. If it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S805, and if not, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S805, a fixed notification state process A (to be described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S806, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state. If so, the process proceeds to step S807; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S807, AT1 state processing A (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S808, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a judge state. If it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S809, and if not, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S809, judge state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

  In step S810, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state. If so, the process proceeds to step S811. If not, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, judge state processing A (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S812, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the withdrawal state. If this is the case, the process proceeds to step S813, and if not, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S813, retraction state processing A (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S814, an instruction information setting process (to be described in detail later) relating to the setting of the instruction information is executed.

<High navigation state common processing A>
Next, the high navigation state common process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state common process A in step S801 in FIG.

  In step S901, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter> 0. If the effect state counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S902; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S902, the value of the effect state counter is decremented by one. Here, the effect state counter is a counter for managing the transition of the effect state. When the number of games in each production state is determined by lottery or a table, the value of the production state counter may be set to a value obtained from a lottery result or a table, or the state may be shifted to a high navigation state. At this time, the number of games in a part or all of the effect states may be determined collectively.

  In step S903, it is determined whether or not the current effect state is the LMT state. If it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S904. If not, the process proceeds to step S909.

  In step S904, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example). If so, the process proceeds to step S906; Proceed to step S905. In this example, since the LMT state is 20G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (= 20G-1G), but may be another numerical value.

  In step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or smaller than the LMT shift value B (1840 in this example). If the value is applicable, the process proceeds to step S906; Proceed to S909. In this example, the high navigation state is ended when the maximum payout number in the LMT state is 20G, the maximum payout number in the 3-betting game is 11 (the maximum increase number is 8), and the difference number exceeds 2000. Therefore, the LMT shift value B is set to 1840 (= 2000 sheets−8 sheets × 20 G), but may be another numerical value.

  In step S906, the LMT initial value (19 in this example) is set in the effect state counter. In the next step S907, freeze information (various information for executing the freeze effect) is set. In step S908, after the LMT state is set as the effect state, the process proceeds to step S909. Thereby, the effect state shifts from the game to the LMT state. In this example, in order to shift from the game to the LMT state, the LMT initial value is set to 19 (= 20G-1G), but another numerical value may be used.

  In step S909, after performing other high navigation state common processing A, the high navigation state common processing A ends.

<Normal state processing A>
Next, the normal state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state processing A in step S803 in FIG.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether or not ceiling counter> 0. If ceiling counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1002; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1002, the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by one. Here, the ceiling counter is a counter for managing the number of games to the ceiling. In the present embodiment, an initial value (700 in this example) is set in the ceiling counter in step S705 of the high navigation state transition processing described with reference to FIG. You may.

  In step S1003, it is determined whether the AT1 winning flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1004, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0, and if it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step 1005. In step S1005, an AT1 transfer lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 transfer lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT1 state. In this example, the success or failure is determined based on a result of an internal lottery process of a winning combination, a random number value, or the like. Note that the content of the AT1 shift lottery is not limited to this example. For example, whether to win or not may be determined in consideration of the value of the high navigation state counter or the like, or a point may be determined based on the result of the internal lottery process of the winning combination. May be given, and the determination may be made based on the points.

  In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the player has won the AT1 transfer lottery in step S1005. If the player has won, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1007, an AT1 type lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 type lottery is a lottery for determining the type of the AT1 state, and in this example, the type is determined to be either “high” or “low” based on a random number value or the like. Note that the content of the AT1 type lottery is not limited to this example. For example, “high” is selected as the AT1 type in the lottery in the case of winning the AT1 shift lottery than in the lottery in the case of reaching the ceiling. A configuration that is easy (or difficult to select) may be adopted.

  In step S1008, the result of the AT1 type lottery in step S1007 is set to the AT1 type, and in the next step S1009, the number of games is determined by lottery, and the number of games is set in the effect state counter. In step S1010, after turning on the AT1 winning flag, the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In step S1011, it is determined whether the AT1 type is “low”. If it is, the process proceeds to step S1012, and if not, the process proceeds to step 1014. In step S1012, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed. Here, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining a numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1013, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1012 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In step S1014, a judge mode lottery is performed. Here, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining any one of a plurality of judge modes (in this example, three types of “normal”, “high accuracy”, and “heaven”). In this example, the judge mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1015, after the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1014 is set to the judge mode, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1106, after performing other normal state processing A, the normal state processing A ends.

<Fixed notification state processing A>
Next, the confirmation notification state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the confirmation notification state process A of step S805 in FIG.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether the AT1 type is “low”. If the AT1 type is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1102; otherwise, the process proceeds to step 1107. In step S1102, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed. As described above, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining a numerical value to be added to the promotion counter, and in this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1103, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1102 is added to the promotion counter, and the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is equal to or greater than the ceiling value (for example, 700). If the value is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1105, "high" is set for the AT1 type, and in the next step S1106, "high accuracy" is set for the judge mode, and the flow advances to step S1109.

  In step S1107, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one of a plurality of judge modes (in this example, three types of “normal”, “high accuracy”, and “heaven”). In this example, the judge mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1108, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1107 is set to the judge mode, and the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, after performing other finalized notification state processing A, the finalized notification state processing A ends.

<AT1 state processing A>
Next, the AT1 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT1 state processing A in step S807 of FIG.

  In step S1201, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one of a plurality of judge modes (in this example, three types of “normal”, “high accuracy”, and “heaven”). In this example, the judge mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1202, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1201 is set to the judge mode, and the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, after performing other AT1 state processing A, the AT1 state processing A ends.

<Judge state processing A>
Next, the judge state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the judge state process A in step S809 in FIG.

  In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the cancellation counter> 0. If the release counter is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S1302; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1302, the value of the cancellation counter is decremented by one. Here, the release counter is a counter for managing the number of games until the judge mode is released. In the present embodiment, the lottery value is set to the cancellation counter in step S2104 of the AT1 state process B described later, but may be another numerical value. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the cancellation counter = 0. If the release counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S1306; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1304.

  In step S1304, a cancellation lottery according to the judge mode is performed. In the next step S1305, if the cancellation lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1307. . Here, the cancellation lottery is a lottery that determines whether or not to shift to the AT2 state. In this example, if the judge mode is heaven and the lottery is released, the heaven in the judge mode is continued without shifting to the AT2 state. If the judge mode is in heaven and a specific rare role (in this example, small role 2 or small role 3) is internally won, the AT2 has a 100% probability regardless of the result of the cancellation lottery. Transition to the state. The content of the cancellation lottery is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a certain specialization zone.

  In step S1306, after the determined state is set to the judge state, the process proceeds to step S1307. In this example, in step S1303, when it is determined that the cancellation counter is 0 (when the heaven in the judge mode ends), the AT2 state is set to the judge state in step S1306. That is, in this example, when the heaven in the judge mode ends, the state shifts to the AT2 state with a probability of 100%. In steps S1304 to S1305, when the judge mode is heaven and the lottery is released, the heaven in the judge mode is set to the judge state. Also, in steps S1304 to S1305, if the judge mode is heaven and a specific rare combination (in this example, small combination 2 or small combination 3) is internally won, regardless of the result of the cancellation lottery, In step S1306, the AT2 state is set to the judge state.

  In step S1307, after performing other judge state processing A, the AT1 state processing A ends.

<AT2 state processing A>
Next, the AT2 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT2 state process A in step S811 of FIG.

  In step S1401, an AT number addition lottery is performed. Here, the AT number addition lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games to be added (added) to the number of AT games. In step S1402, a lottery result value (number of additional games) of the AT number addition lottery is added to the effect state counter.

  In step S1403, a judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one of a plurality of judge modes (in this example, three types of “normal”, “high accuracy”, and “heaven”). In this example, the judge mode is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1403, the lottery result of the judge mode lottery in step S1401 is set to the judge mode, and the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, after performing other AT2 state processing A, the AT2 state processing A ends.

<Retraction state processing A>
Next, the retraction state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the retraction state processing A in step S813 of FIG.

  In step S1501, a pull-back lottery is performed, and in step SS1502, it is determined whether or not the pull-out lottery has been won. In step S1503, the determined state is set as the retraction state. In this example, the lottery result of the retraction lottery in step S1501 is set to the retraction state. In step S1504, after performing other withdrawal state processing A, the withdrawal state processing A ends.

<Instruction information setting process>
Next, the instruction information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing details of the flow of the instruction information setting process in step S814 of FIG.

  In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a state in which instruction information can be notified. Here, the indication information notification enabled state indicates the AT1, AT2, and LMT states in this example. If the effect state is the instruction information informing state, the process proceeds to step S1602; otherwise, the instruction information setting process ends.

  In step S1602, it is determined whether or not an internal winning has been achieved for the pushing combination in the winning combination internal lottery process. In this example, the pushing order means an internal win of “small win 4” in the condition apparatus. If the internal winning has been achieved for the pushing order, the process proceeds to step S1603; otherwise, the instruction information setting process ends.

  In step S1603, the pressing order of the correct answer is set in the information (instruction information) related to the notification content of the instruction information notification. As a result, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 is executed (see FIG. 8). Although not shown, in step S1603, other operation navigation information setting processing is executed. For example, a preparation is made to transmit an operation navigation command including instruction information indicating the order of pressing the correct answer to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 is executed by the first sub control unit 400.

  In the confirmation notification state of the present example, the medals continue to decrease until the small win corresponding to the AT1 type wins. Therefore, it is ensured that the payout ratio is less than 1 and, for example, the push-down play is performed. When the internal winning is performed, the operation navigation is executed only for a specific type of pressing order (for example, when the internal winning is performed for the small role 4, any one of the small role 4LCR,..., The small role 4RCL or The operation navigation may be executed for a plurality of times, or the operation navigation may be executed once in three times (for example, if the player cannot win three times in the pressing order, the next pressing order may be executed). The pressing order navigation may be executed when the role is internally won).

<Production state control processing B>
Next, the effect state control processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the effect state control processing B in step S113 in FIG.

  In step S1701, it is determined whether the processing prohibition flag is off. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1702; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1702, it is determined whether the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1703. If the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, if the high navigation state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1704.

  In step S1703, since it is in the low navigation state, the low navigation state processing B is executed. Although illustration is omitted, in the low navigation state processing B, when the transition to the high navigation state is determined, processing for setting an effect state based on information on each effect state is performed.

  On the other hand, in step S1704, since the vehicle is in the high navigation state, high navigation state processing B (described in detail later) is executed. In step S1705, after performing the other effect state control processing B, the effect state control processing B ends.

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, the high navigation state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state process B in step S1704 of FIG.

  In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a normal state. If it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1802, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1802, normal state processing B (to be described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a confirmed notification state. If the state is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1804, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1804, a confirmation notification state process B (to be described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state. If so, the process proceeds to step S1806; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1806, an AT1 status process B (to be described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a judge state. If it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1808, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1808, a judge state process B (to be described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state. If it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1810, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1812, AT2 state processing B (described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S1811, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the withdrawal state. If this is the case, the process proceeds to step S1812, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1813. In step S1812, a retraction state process B (to be described in detail later) is executed.

  In step S1813, after performing the LMT state processing B (to be described in detail later), the high navigation state processing B ends.

<Normal state processing B>
Next, the normal state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state processing B in step S1802 in FIG.

  In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0 (whether or not the normal state has ended). If the effect state counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S1902; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1902, the process proceeds to step S1903 after setting the final notification state to the effect state. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the normal state to the confirmation notification state, and an effect (for example, a bonus confirmation display) according to the confirmation notification state is started. In step S1903, after performing other normal state processing B, the normal state processing B ends.

<Fixed notification state processing B>
Next, the confirmation notification state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the fixed notification state process B in step S1804 of FIG.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether the confirmation notification flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2002, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2002, after the confirmation notification flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the result is an internal winning result of the AT1 type.

  Specifically, in this example, when the AT1 type is low, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is “re-gaming combination 2, 4 to 10” of the condition device No. 3, and the AT1 type is If the result is high, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is “re-game combination 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13” of the condition device No. 4. If the result of the determination is true, the process proceeds to step S2004; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2006.

  In step S2004, the AT1 initial value (20 in this example) is set in the effect state counter. In the next step S2005, the effect state is set to the AT1 state, and then the process proceeds to step S2006. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the confirmed notification state to the AT1 state, and an effect (for example, operation navigation) according to the AT1 state is started. In the present embodiment, an initial value (20 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2004, but another value may be used. In step S2006, after performing other determined notification state processing B, the determined notification state processing B ends.

<AT1 state processing B>
Next, the AT1 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT1 state process B in step S1806 in FIG.

  In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0 (whether or not the AT1 state has ended). If the effect state counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S2102; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2102, a judge initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter. In the present embodiment, an initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2102, but may be another numerical value. Therefore, for example, the initial value may be changed according to the production state immediately before the judge state, or the initial value may be determined by lottery.

  In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the judge mode is heaven. If the judge mode is applicable, the process proceeds to step S2104. If not, the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2104, the lottery value (the number of games) determined by lottery is set in the cancellation counter, and then the process proceeds to step 2105. Although the content of the lottery in step S2104 is not particularly limited, in this example, a smaller value is selected as the set value is higher, a smaller value is selected when there is stock in the heaven mode, and the value of the high navigation state counter is smaller. The configuration is such that a smaller numerical value is selected.

  In step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2106 after setting the judge state to the effect state. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT1 state to the judge state, and an effect according to the judge state is started. In step S2106, after performing other AT1 state processing B, the AT1 state processing B ends.

<Judge state processing B>
Next, the judge state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the judge state process B in step S1808 of FIG.

  In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the judge state is determined (whether or not the judge has succeeded). If the judgment is made, the process proceeds to step S2202; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2202, an AT twice initial number lottery is performed. This AT2 number initial number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games in the AT2 state. In this example, one of the numerical values of 30, 50, 55, 66, and 100 is selected by lottery. Note that, as an exception, when the setting value is setting 5, 55 is selected regardless of the lottery, and when the setting value is setting 6, 66 is selected regardless of the lottery.

  In step S2203, the lottery value (the number of games) of the AT2 initial number lottery is set in the effect state counter, and the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, after setting the AT2 state to the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2208. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the judge state to the AT2 state, and the effect according to the AT2 state is started.

  In step S2205, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0 (whether or not the judge state has ended). If so, the process proceeds to step S2206; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2206, a retraction initial value (1 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2207, the effect state is set to the retraction state. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the withdrawal state, and the effect according to the withdrawal state is started.

  In the present embodiment, the return initial value (1 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2206, but may be another numerical value. Therefore, for example, it may be a fixed value other than 1 or 1 + α (variable value). In step S2208, after performing the other judgment state processing B, the judgment state processing B ends.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, the AT2 state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT2 state process B in step S1810 in FIG.

  In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0 (whether or not the AT2 state has ended). If the effect state counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S2302; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2302, a judge initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter. In the present embodiment, the initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2302, but may be another numerical value. Therefore, for example, the initial value may be changed according to the production state immediately before the judge state, or the initial value may be determined by lottery.

  In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the judge mode is heaven. If it is, the process proceeds to step S2304. If not, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2304, the lottery value (the number of games) determined by lottery is set in the cancellation counter, and the process proceeds to step 2305. Although the content of the lottery in step S2304 is not particularly limited, in this example, a smaller value is selected as the set value is higher, a smaller value is selected when there is stock in the heaven mode, and the value of the high navigation state counter is smaller. The configuration is such that a smaller numerical value is selected.

  In step S2305, the process proceeds to step S2306 after setting the judge state to the effect state. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state, and the effect according to the judge state is started. In step S2306, after performing other AT2 state processing B, the AT2 state processing B ends.

<Retraction state processing B>
Next, the retraction state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the retraction state process B in step S1812 of FIG.

  In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the withdrawal state is determined (whether or not to withdraw). If it is true, the process proceeds to step S2402. If not, the process proceeds to step S2405. In step S2402, the initial number of times of AT is determined by lottery. This AT2 number initial number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games in the AT2 state. In this example, one of the numerical values of 30, 50, 55, 66, and 100 is selected by lottery. Note that, as an exception, when the setting value is setting 5, 55 is selected regardless of the lottery, and when the setting value is setting 6, 66 is selected regardless of the lottery.

  In step S2404, the process goes to step S2407 after setting the AT2 state to the effect state. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the retraction state to the AT2 state, and the effect according to the AT2 state is started. In the present embodiment, in the initial hit (the transition from the low navigation state to the first AT state after the transition from the high navigation state to the first AT state), the effect state is transitioned to AT1, whereas in the judge state or the retraction state. The effect state is shifted to AT2 which is more advantageous to the player than AT1.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0 (whether or not the retraction state has been completed). If so, the process proceeds to step S2406; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2406, the high navigation state end standby flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2407, after performing other withdrawal state processing B, the withdrawal state processing B ends.

<LMT state processing B>
Next, the LMT state processing B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the LMT state processing B in step S1813 in FIG.

  In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter is 0 (whether or not the LMT state has ended). If the effect state counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S2502; otherwise, the LMT state process B ends. In step S2502, the high navigation state end standby flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, after performing other LMT state processing B, the LMT state processing B ends.

<High navigation state end processing>
Next, the high navigation state end processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high-navigation state end processing in step S114 in FIG.

  In step S2601, it is determined whether the high navigation state flag is on. If the high-navigation state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2602; otherwise, the high-navigation state end processing ends. In step S2602, it is determined whether the high-navigation state end standby flag is on. If the high-navigation-state end standby flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2603; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2604.

  In step S2603, the high navigation state end standby flag is turned off. After the processing in step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2606.

  In step S2604, it is determined whether the value of the high navigation state counter is 0. This corresponds to the case where the value of the high-navigation state counter may become 0 before the high-navigation state end standby flag is turned on when there is a game with the processing prohibition flag on. It is. If the value of the high navigation state counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S2606; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2605.

  In step S2605, it is determined whether or not the difference number counter> the high-navigation-state end maximum value. If so, the process proceeds to step S2606. If not, the high-navigation state end processing ends. This is because if there is a game in which the processing prohibition flag is on, the condition of the difference number counter> the high navigation state end maximum value may be satisfied before the high navigation state end standby flag is turned on. It corresponds to the case.

  In step S2606, the high navigation state flag is turned off. As a result, the lit high navigation state lamp 190 is turned off. In step S2607, after executing other high navigation state end processing, the high navigation state end processing is ended. In other high-navigation state end processing, for example, processing for setting the AT-related gaming state to a low-navigation state (normal mode), initializing various flags and counters used for transition control of the high-navigation state, and the like are performed. Do.

<Normal state processing A (Modification 1)>
Next, a normal state process A according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 19 and is a flowchart showing the flow of the normal state process A according to the first modification in detail. Note that the same processing as the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19 is denoted by the same reference numeral in the figure, and description thereof is omitted.

  The normal state processing A according to Modification 1 is obtained by deleting the processing of steps S1012 to S1013 and adding the processing of steps S1021 to S1025 to the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG.

  Step S1021 is a process that is executed when it is determined in step S1004 that the ceiling counter is 0. In this example, in step S1021, a process of setting the ceiling arrival flag to ON is executed.

  Step S1022 is a process executed when it is determined that the AT1 type is “low”. In this example, in step S1022, it is determined whether the ceiling arrival flag is off or on, and In this case, the process proceeds to step S1023; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1023, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1024, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In step S1024, "high" is set for the AT1 type. In the next step S1025, the judge mode is set to "high accuracy", and then the process proceeds to step S1106.

  In the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19, the AT1 type is set to “low” or “high” when the ceiling arrives in the normal state, and after shifting to the finalized notification state, the AT1 type is changed from “low” to “high”. ". On the other hand, in the normal state processing A according to the first modification, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the AT1 type is set to “low”. And promoted to "high", and the judge mode is set accurately.

<Normal state processing A (Modification 2)>
Next, a normal state process A according to Modification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 19 and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the normal state process A according to the second modification. Note that the same processes as those in the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 19 and the normal state process A (Modification 1) described with reference to FIG. 36 are denoted by the same reference numerals in the figure, and description thereof is omitted. I do.

  The normal state process A according to Modification 2 is different from the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 19 in that the processes in steps S1012 to S1013 are deleted, and the processes in steps S1021 to S1025 and the processes in steps S1031 to S1032 are performed. Is added.

  Step S1031 is a process that is executed when it is determined in step S1022 that the ceiling arrival flag is on. In this example, after executing the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1031, in the next step S1032 After adding the numerical value (lottery result value) determined by the promotion counter addition lottery to the promotion counter, the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In the normal state processing A according to the first modification, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the AT1 type is changed from “low” to “high”. It was configured to be promoted and to set the judge mode accurately. On the other hand, in the normal state processing A according to the second modification, when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the AT1 type is promoted from “low” to “high” and the judge mode is set with high accuracy. However, the state is managed using a promotion counter, and if the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high". I have.

<Fixed Notification State Processing A (Modification 1)>
Next, a fixed notification state process A according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 20, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the fixed notification state process A according to the first modification. Note that the same processes as those in the fixed notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 are denoted by the same reference numerals in the drawing, and description thereof is omitted.

  The finalized notification state process A according to the first modification is obtained by deleting the processes of steps S1102 to S1104 and adding the processes of steps S1121 to S1125 to the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. .

  In step S1120, it is determined whether or not ceiling counter> 0. If ceiling counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1121, otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1101. In step S1121, the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by one.

  Step S1123 is a process executed when the AT1 type is determined to be “low” in step S1101. In this example, in step S1123, it is determined whether the ceiling arrival flag is off or on, and In this case, the process proceeds to step S1124; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1124, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1125, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1125, the process proceeds to step S1105 after setting the ceiling flag to ON.

  In the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, after transitioning to the finalized notification state, the AT1 type is promoted from "low" to "high". On the other hand, in the finalized notification state process A according to the first modification, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the finalized notification state, the AT1 The type is promoted from "low" to "high" and the judge mode is set accurately.

<Fixed Notification State Processing A (Modification 2)>
Next, the fixed notification state process A according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 20, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the fixed notification state process A according to the second modification. Note that the same processes as those in the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 and the finalized notification state process A (Modified Example 2) described with reference to FIG. Is omitted.

  The finalized notification state process A according to the second modification differs from the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 in that the processes of steps S1102 to S1104 are deleted, and the processes of steps S1121 to S1125 and step S1131 are performed. S1133 is added.

  Step S1131 is a process executed when it is determined that the AT1 type is “low” in step S1101. In this example, after executing the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1131, the next step S1132 is performed. In, after the numerical value (lottery result value) determined by the promotion counter addition lottery is added to the promotion counter, the process proceeds to step S1133. In step S1133, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is equal to or larger than the ceiling value. If the value is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1123.

  In the finalized notification state process A according to the first modification, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the finalized notification state, the AT1 type is set to “low”. From "high" to "high". On the other hand, in the finalized notification state process A according to the second modified example, the AT1 type is promoted from “low” to “high” when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the finalized notification state. Further, the state is managed using the promotion counter, and when the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value, the AT1 type is promoted from “low” to “high”, while the value of the promotion counter is less than the ceiling value. , The AT1 type is promoted from “low” to “high” when the ceiling counter is 0.

<Fixed Notification State Processing A and Fixed Notification State Processing B (Modification 3)>
Next, a fixed notification state process A and a fixed notification state process B according to Modification 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. FIG. 40 is a view corresponding to FIG. 20 and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the finalized notification state process A according to the third modification. FIG. 41 is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 29, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the confirmation notification state process B according to the third modification. Note that the same processes as those in the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 and the finalized notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29 are denoted by the same reference numerals in the figure, and description thereof is omitted.

  The finalized notification state process A according to the third modification illustrated in FIG. 40 is obtained by adding the process of step S1140 to the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. Step S1140 is processing executed when it is determined in step S1104 that the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value. In step S1140, the process proceeds to step S1109 after setting the promotion flag to ON.

  The finalized notification state process B according to the third modification illustrated in FIG. 41 is obtained by adding the processes of steps S2010 to S2012 to the finalized notification state process B described with reference to FIG. Step S2010 is a process executed when it is determined in step S2001 that the finalized notification flag is on. In step S2010, it is determined whether the promotion flag is on or off. The process proceeds to step S2003 if it is off.

  In step S2011, it is determined whether the promotion notification is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2012, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2012, after the promotion notification is turned on, the process proceeds to step S2006.

  In the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 and the finalized notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, if the AT1 type is “low”, the promotion counter is not added. It was configured so that the internal winning of No. 4 did not occur at the same time. On the other hand, in the finalized notification state processing A and the finalized notification state processing B according to the third modification, the promotion of the AT1 type and the internal winning of the condition device No. 4 can be simultaneously generated. It is configured not to shift to the state. With such a configuration, the operation navigation and the promotion effect at the time of the AT1 type promotion can be prevented from being executed at the same time, so that only the promotion effect can be shown firmly to the player, and the interest of the player can be enhanced. May be able to.

  Note that when the normal state processing A according to the modification 1 described with reference to FIG. 36 and the normal state processing A according to the modification 2 described with reference to FIG. 37 are applied, the AT1 type promotion in the ceiling reaching game is performed. And the internal winning of the condition device No. 4 may occur at the same time. In this case, as in the third modification, the promotion flag is used to prevent the game that has occurred at the same time from shifting to the AT1 state. I just need.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a slot machine according to a modification of the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In addition, in order to avoid redundant description, only a configuration different from the game console according to the first embodiment will be described in principle. Reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 51 are used only in principle for describing the modified example of the first embodiment. Even when duplicated numerals are shown in other drawings, the first embodiment will be described. In the description of the modified example, the reference numerals shown in FIGS.

<Type of winning combinations>
First, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and operation or payout of each winning combination.

  The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a special combination (special combination 1) and a general combination (re-gaming combination 1 to re-gaming combination 3 and small combination 1 to small combination 3). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and may be arbitrarily adopted.

  Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination that shifts to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. In addition, the re-gaming combinations 1 to 3 are combinations that enable re-gaming without inserting new medals. These winning combinations may be referred to as “operators”. The “winning” in the present embodiment also includes a case where a symbol combination of an actor without a medal payout (without a medal payout) is displayed on the activated line. The winning of the re-gaming combinations 1 to 3 is included.

  The special combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special game state by winning. It should be noted that no medal is paid out for winning the role itself. The corresponding symbol combination is “BAR-BAR-BAR”.

  When the special combination 1 is internally won, a special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to a special internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2).

  This flag is kept on until the internally won combination is won, and the internally won combination is easily won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role 1 is not internally won in the game which is internally won, the special role is internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (in this example, "BAR- BAR-BAR "symbol combination), and the state is easy to win. The special role internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

  The main controller 300 shifts the gaming state to a special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number (300 in this example) is paid out, the game is shifted to a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT1). The special game state (RT3) and the re-game low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

  The “re-gaming role (re-gaming role 1 to re-gaming role 3)” is a prize-winning role (operating role) capable of performing a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in a next game by winning. No medals will be paid out. In addition, the corresponding symbol combination is such that the replaying role 1 is “replay-replay-replay (normal replay)”, the replaying role 2 is “bell-replay-replay (promotion replay)”, and the replaying role 3 is “replay-replay. Replay-bell (falling replay 2) ".

  “Small win (small win 1 to small win 3)” is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is “ANY-Cherry-ANY” in small win 1 and 2 in small win. The “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon (watermelon 1)” and the small role 3 are “bell-bell-bell (bell)”. The corresponding payout number is as shown in FIG. In the case of “ANY-Cherry-ANY”, the symbol on the middle reel 111 may be “Cherry”, and the symbols on the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbols. In addition, when the small win 2 (watermelon 1) is internally won, the watermelon symbols are arranged beyond four frames, and if the timing for operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not appropriate, the watermelon symbols will be a winning line. Do not stop at

<Type of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming state of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 43 (a) is a transition diagram of a game state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention is roughly classified into a low replay probability state (RT1), a high replay probability state (RT4), and a special role internal winning state (RT2). , And a special game state (RT3). In the present embodiment, the game state roughly divided into the four is referred to as an RT-based game state. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to a so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter, referred to as an AT-based game state), and according to the AT-based game state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub-control unit 400 sets a game state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Note that the low replay probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability that the condition device related to the replay combination is not fluctuating (default state), a high replay probability state (RT4), a special combination internal winning state (RT2) ) And the special game state (RT3) are also states in which the probability that the condition device relating to the replaying combination will operate varies from the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 44 (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table used in the internal lottery process of the winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each game state (game state of the RT system), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value of each winning combination.

  The internal winning probability of a winning combination in each game state described below is calculated based on random data obtained from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306 by obtaining numerical data corresponding to the range of the random drawing data associated with each winning combination at the time of the internal random drawing. It is determined by a value obtained by dividing by numerical data (for example, 65535) in a numerical value range. For example, in the replay low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small win 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small win 1 is 512/65536 × 100 ≒ 0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each character range and loss are associated with each numerical range.

  The random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is determined to be a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to which combination, and the internal lottery combination is determined. This lottery data is provided with settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probabilities of at least one role are different, and a game store attendant or the like can arbitrarily select and set any one of the set values. Note that the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this probability.

  Hereinafter, the gaming state of the RT system of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Re-game low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is the lowest (unfavorable to the player) among other game states (for example, game states excluding the special game state), and is referred to as a normal game state. There is also. In the re-game low probability state, the winning combination to be internally won is randomly selected with reference to the lottery table in the row of “RT1” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG.

  The winning combinations that are internally won in the re-game low probability state include special role 1, special role 1 + small role 1, special role 1 + small role 2, re-game role 1, re-game role 1 + re-game role 2, small role 1, There are a small role 2, a small role 3a, and a small role 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. In addition, the case where the symbol combination related to the winning is not stopped in the winning line may be referred to as “losing”. In addition, the fact that the player did not win the winning combination may be expressed as “the winner has been lost”.

  Here, “special combination 1 + small combination 1” indicates that special combination 1 and small combination 1 have been internally won at the same time. Similarly, “special combination 1 + small combination 2” indicates that special combination 1 and small combination 2 are internally won at the same time. In these cases, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to any of the winning combinations is displayed according to the operation of the player. More specifically, as long as it is not possible to win any of the winning combinations in any of the winning lines, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning line are stopped.

  Further, “re-gaming role 1 + re-gaming role 2” indicates that re-gaming role 1 and re-gaming role 2 have been internally won at the same time. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the player's operation sequence. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the correct operation order that is a predetermined operation order, a symbol combination (promotion replay) corresponding to the replaying combination 2 is displayed on the winning line (see FIG. a) In the remarks column, see the correct answer in the pushing order), otherwise, the symbol combination (normal replay) corresponding to the replaying game 1 is displayed on the winning line (FIG. 44 (a) in the remarks column) , Push order incorrect answer).

  Combinations in which the winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as “re-combination 1 + re-combination 2”, may be referred to as “push-combination”.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the operation sequence of the correct answer of “re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 2” will be described in detail. FIG. 44 (b) is a diagram illustrating the correct answer operation sequence of the pushing sequence of the present embodiment.

  The “re-game part 1 + re-game part 2” is precisely set to be subdivided into three “re-game part 2L”, “re-game part 2C”, and “re-game part 2R”, A different correct answer operation order is assigned to each of the subdivided “re-games 1 + re-games 2”. Note that the range of the lottery data associated with each of the three subdivided “re-games 1 + re-games 2” is the same.

  For example, in a case where “re-gaming role 2L” of “re-gaming role 1 + re-gaming role 2” is internally won, a stop operation using the first stop reel as the left reel 110 is a correct operation, and other operations are not performed. The stop operation is an incorrect operation. In the case where “re-gaming role 2C” of “re-gaming role 1 + re-gaming role 2” is internally won, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the middle reel 111 is the correct operation, and The stop operation is an incorrect operation. In the case where the “re-gaming role 2R” of the “re-gaming role 1 + re-gaming role 2” is internally won, the stop operation of setting the first stop reel to the right reel 112 is the correct operation. The stop operation is an incorrect operation.

  Up to this point, “replay combination 1 + replay combination 2” in FIG. 44 (a) has been described, but “small role 3a” also has a different winning combination according to the player's operation order.

  When "Small win 3a" is internally won, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to Small win 3 (bell) is displayed on the winning line in accordance with the operation order of the player (FIG. 44 ( a) See remarks). More specifically, when a stop operation is performed in accordance with a correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the pay line, and 11 medals are paid out ( Bell prize). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the correct answer operation order, "bell-bell-bell" is not displayed on the pay line (losing).

  On the other hand, when the internal winning of the "small win 3b" is achieved, "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order, and 11 medals are paid out. (See the remarks column in FIG. 44 (a)).

  Here, the operation sequence of the correct answer of “small win 3a” will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  "Small win 3a" is exactly six "small win 3LCR", "small win 3LRC", "small win 3CLR", "small win 3CRL", "small win 3RLC" and "small win 3RCL" It is set so as to be subdivided, and a different correct operation order is assigned to each of the subdivided "small wins 3a". Note that the range of the lottery data associated with each of the six subdivided "small wins 3a" is the same.

  For example, when the internal winning of “Small win 3LCR” of “Small win 3a” is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is a correct operation, and the other stop operations are incorrect operations. In the case where “Small Winner 3CRL” among the “Small Winners 3a” is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is the correct operation. It should be noted that “Small win 3a” and “Small win 3b” described above are the same in the gaming state described below.

  In FIG. 43 (a), when the condition (A) is satisfied in the low replay probability state (RT1), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 2 is displayed on the payline (replay) In the case of winning the role 2), it is shown that the game shifts to a replay high probability state (RT2) described later. Further, FIG. 11 shows that when the condition (C) is satisfied, that is, when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the state shifts to a special combination internal winning state (RT3) described later. ing. Further, when the condition (D) is satisfied, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed on the activated line (when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is won), It is shown that a transition is made to a special game state (RT4) described later.

  In the present embodiment, the small role 3a as the pushing sequence is a single role. However, the small role 3a may be an overlapping role to be won simultaneously with other small roles. When the first to third stop operations are performed in accordance with the operation sequence of the correct answer, the point of winning the small combination 3 is the same.

  For example, if "Small win 3 + Small win A + Small win B" is set and (1) the correct answer stop operation (the order of correct answer operation) is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 3 is displayed on the activated line. When the (2) incorrect stop operation is performed (the first stop operation is correct), the symbol combination corresponding to the small role A is displayed on the activated line, and (3) the incorrect stop operation is performed. When the first stop operation is incorrect (the first stop operation is incorrect) and the stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of the symbol of the small combination B, the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination B is displayed on the activated line, (4) If the stop operation of the incorrect answer is performed (the first stop operation is incorrect) and the stop operation is performed outside the drawing range of the symbol of the small part B, the spilled eyes will be on the activated line. It may be displayed.

  When “Small win 3 + Small win X” is set, (1) when the stop operation of the correct answer (the stop operation from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is correct) corresponds to the small win 3 The symbol combination to be performed is displayed on the activated line, and (2) the incorrect stop operation is performed (the first stop operation is correct, the second stop operation is incorrect, or the first stop operation is incorrect, the second stop is performed) If the operation is correct) and the third stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of the symbol of small win X, the symbol combination corresponding to small win X is displayed on the activated line, and (3) the stop operation of incorrect answer Is performed (the first stop operation is correct, the second stop operation is incorrect, or the first stop operation is incorrect, and the second stop operation is correct), and the third stop is performed outside the drawing range of the symbol of the small role X. When an operation is performed, the spilled eye may be displayed on the activated line. In the third stop operation, a small prize X may be won with the aim of the small prize X. Here, the correct answer of the stop operation means that the operation order is correct, and / or the operation timing is suitable (operation within the pull-in range of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined small winning combination).

  Also, in addition to the above-mentioned “Small win 3 + Small win X”, “Small win 3 + Small win Y” is set. (1) When the stop operation of the correct answer is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 3 is changed. Displayed on the activated line, (2) when the operation of stopping the incorrect answer is performed and the third stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of the symbol of small win X, the symbol combination corresponding to small win Y is (3) When the incorrect stop operation is performed and the third stop operation is performed outside the drawing range of the symbol of the small part Y, the spilled line is displayed on the active line. You may make it. In this case, in the third stop operation in the stop operation of the incorrect answer, it is not known whether the role to be targeted is the small role X or the small role Y, and therefore, it is possible to prevent the small portion winning from being shot at the third stop operation. There are cases.

<Replay high probability state (RT4)>
The re-game high probability state (RT4) is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game combination is higher than the re-game low probability state (RT1). In the re-game high probability state (RT4), a winning combination to be internally won is randomly selected with reference to a lottery table in a row of “RT4” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG.

  The winning combinations that are internally won in the replay high probability state (RT4) include special role 1, special role 1 + small role 1, special role 1 + small role 2, replay role 1, replay role 1 + replay role 3, small There are a role 1, a small role 2, a small role 3a, and a small role 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  Here, the “re-gaming role 1 + re-gaming role 3” indicates that the re-gaming role 1 and the re-gaming role 3 are internally won at the same time. In this case, it is determined which combination of symbols is displayed according to the player's operation sequence. More specifically, when the stop operation is performed in accordance with the correct operation order, which is a predetermined operation order, a symbol combination (normal replay) corresponding to the replaying combination 1 is displayed on the winning line (see FIG. a) In the remarks column, see the correct answer in the pushing order), otherwise, the symbol combination (fall replay) corresponding to the replaying game 3 is displayed on the winning line (FIG. 44 (a) in the remarks column). , Push order incorrect answer). That is, “re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3” is also the pushing sequence.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the operation sequence of the correct answer of “re-game combination 1 + re-game combination 3” will be described in detail.

  To be more precise, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), there are three “re-games 1 + re-games 3”, “re-games 3L”, “re-games 3C”, and “re-games 3R”. , And a different correct operation order is assigned to each of the subdivided “re-game 1 + re-game 3”. Note that the range of the lottery data associated with each of the three subdivided “re-games 1 + re-games 3” is the same.

  For example, in the case where the “re-gaming role 3 + L” among the “re-gaming role 1 + re-gaming role 3” is internally won, the stop operation of setting the first stop reel to the left reel 110 is a correct operation, and the other operation is not performed. The stop operation is an incorrect operation. In the case where “replaying game 3C” among “replaying game 1 + replaying game 3” is internally won, the operation of stopping the first stop reel as the middle reel 111 is the correct operation. The stop operation is an incorrect operation. In the case where the “replaying game 3R” among the “replaying game 1 + replaying game 3” is internally won, the stop operation of setting the first stop reel to the right reel 112 is the correct operation. The stop operation is an incorrect operation.

  In the present embodiment, when an internal winning is performed in the pushing order (re-gaming role 1 + re-gaming role 2, re-gaming role 1 + re-gaming role 3, small role 3a), a unique combination is performed based on the subdivided internal winning combination. In this case, the correct answer operation order is determined, that is, the correct answer operation order is determined by one lottery process. However, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the pushing sequence is not subdivided, in the internal lottery process of the winning combination, after the internal winning in the pushing sequence, the lottery process for determining the operation sequence of the correct answer is further executed to execute the correct answer operation. The order may be determined.

  In FIG. 43 (a), when the condition (B) is satisfied in the replay high probability state (RT4), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination 3 is displayed on the activated line (replay) In the case of winning the role 3, it is shown that the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1) described above. Further, FIG. 11 shows that when the condition (C) is satisfied, that is, when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the state shifts to a special combination internal winning state (RT2) described later. Further, when the condition (D) is satisfied, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed on the activated line (when the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is won). , A transition to a special game state (RT3) described later.

<Special role internal winning status (RT2)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, the flag is set to this flag. This is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to a corresponding special combination can be displayed. In the special role internal winning state, a winning combination to be internally won is selected by lot referring to the lottery table in the row of “RT2” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. The winning combinations that are internally won in the special role internal winning state include a replaying role 1, a small role 1, a small role 2, a small role 3a, and a small role 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  Further, in FIG. 44 (a), when the condition (D) is satisfied in the special combination internal winning state (RT2), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed, It is shown that a transition is made to a special game state (RT4) described later.

<Special gaming state (RT3)>
The special game state (RT3) is a game state most advantageous to the player among all the game states. In the special game state, a winning combination to be internally won is randomly selected with reference to a lottery table in a row of “RT3” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. The winning combination that is internally won in the special game state is only the small combination 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the winning combination is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  FIG. 44 (a) shows that, in the special game state (RT3), when the condition (E) is satisfied, that is, when the specified number is paid out, the state shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). Have been. Specifically, when the game shifts to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, if the payout of more than 275 medals is performed, the re-game low probability state (RT1 ).

  In the present embodiment, the special game state ends when a predetermined number of payouts are executed. For example, the special game state ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times ( The game may end when a prize has been won (for example, eight times) or when a predetermined number of games (for example, six times) have been played.

<Transition of AT game state>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 (b) and 43 (c), an AT-based game state will be described. FIGS. 43 (b) and 43 (c) are transition diagrams of an AT-based gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (a), the game state of the AT system is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode.

  The high navigation state is a state in which the operation navigation is more likely to be executed than the low navigation state, and includes an AT mode and a chance mode. Here, the operation navigation means a pressing order (specifically, a replaying game 1 + replaying game 2, replaying game 1 + replaying game 3, small play 3a) when the internal winning is performed. The effect that informs. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the contents of the stop operation for acquiring the medals, the contents of the stop operation for shifting to the advantageous game state, or maintaining the advantageous game state.

  Here, the operation navigation will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed using the payout number display 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 44 (b) shows display data indicating the correct answer operation sequence of the pressing order of the present embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a diagram in which the display data and the lighting mode of the payout number display 127 are associated with each other.

  For example, the display data 01 is data indicating a stop operation of setting the first stop reel to the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data indicating a stop operation of setting the first stop reel to the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is set. , Data indicating a stop operation in which the first stop reel is set to the right reel 112.

  Therefore, in the AT mode, when the replaying game 2L of “replaying game 1 + replaying game 2” is internally won, since the stop operation of setting the first stop reel to the left reel 110 is correct, the first stop operation is performed on the left. Is displayed, the lighting mode corresponding to the display data 01 is displayed on the number-of-payouts display 127 (see FIG. 45 (a)), and the effect image display device 157 displays Then, an image (for example, the character “1-−”) indicating that the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is displayed (not shown).

  The display data 04 is data indicating a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The display data 05 is the first stop reel. Is a left reel 110, the second stop reel is a right reel 112, and the third stop reel is a middle reel 111. Data indicating a stop operation, and display data 06, the first stop reel is a middle reel 111, and the second stop reel is a The data indicating the stop operation of setting the left reel 110, the third stop reel to the right reel 112, and the display data 07 are as follows: the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel. The display data 08 indicating the stop operation with the reel 110 as the first reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third reel is the third reel. The data indicating the stop operation of setting the stop reel to the middle reel 112 and the display data 09 include the stop operation of setting the first stop reel to the right reel 112, setting the second stop reel to the middle reel 111, and setting the third stop reel to the left reel 110. It is data that suggests.

  Therefore, when the small win 3CLR of “small win 3a” is internally won in the AT mode, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, display data 06 indicating that the first stop operation is middle, the second stop operation is left, and the third stop operation is right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the display data 06. (See FIG. 45 (b)), and the effect image display device 157 displays the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel. An image indicating that the reel 112 is the right reel 112 (for example, the character “213”) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to determine whether the internal winning combination is the replaying combination or the small combination 3a based on the lighting mode of the number-of-payouts display 127. However, for example, the operation of stopping the correct answer of the small winning combination 3a may be set to three options like the replaying combination, and the small winning combination 3a may be configured to be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. Further, the stop operation of the correct answer of the re-game combination may be set to six choices like the small combination 3a, and the re-game combination may be notified using the display data 04 to 09. Also in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

  In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is a state where the execution probability of the operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is a state where the execution probability of the operation navigation is higher than the low navigation state. Is not executed, and the high navigation state may be the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When a stop operation is performed in accordance with the operation content of the operation navigation, an advantageous result is provided to the player, and thus the high navigation state is a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the advantage is, specifically, the total number of game media paid out by the gaming table with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as a bet amount when playing the game for a predetermined period. A ratio, a so-called payout rate (payout rate).

<State transition of AT system>
FIG. 43 (b) is a diagram showing an effect state in each of the AT-based game states. As shown in FIG. 43 (b), each game state of the AT system is further subdivided and managed, and this is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state of the low navigation state is a normal state, and the production state of the high navigation state is a normal state, a fixed notification state, a judge state, a retraction state, a BB state, an AT1, a AT2 state, an LMT (limit) state. Have. The effect state of the high navigation state according to the modification of the first embodiment is the same as the effect state described with reference to FIG. 6C except that the BB state is added, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 according to the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing according to the modification of the first embodiment, and corresponds to the main control unit main processing according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the main control unit main process according to the modification of the first embodiment, the effect state control process A in step S106 of the main control main process according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 10, the effect process in step S107, and The contents of the effect state control processing B in step S113 are changed.

<Effect state control processing A>
Next, the rendering state control processing A in step S121 in FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing a flow of the effect state control process A according to the modification of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the effect state control process A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. It is.

  The effect state control process A according to the modification of the first embodiment is the same process as the effect state control process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. The description is omitted.

<Every game common processing>
Next, the game common processing of step S401 in FIG. 47A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of the per-game common process according to the modification of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the per-game common process according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 15 (b). .

  In the per-game common process according to the modified example of Embodiment 1, the content of Step S501 of the per-game common process according to Embodiment 1 described with reference to FIG. 15B is changed to the content of Step S521. Specifically, in step S521, it is determined whether or not a condition for executing the high navigation state related processing is satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high-navigation state-related processing is that the gaming state is either during the internal winning of the bonus or during the operation of the bonus with a setting difference. Note that the condition is not limited to the operation of the bonus having a setting difference, but may be the operation of all bonuses. If the result of the determination in step S521 is that the conditions for executing the high navigation state-related processing are satisfied, the flow proceeds to step S502; otherwise, the flow proceeds to step S503.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, the high navigation state processing A of step S405 in FIG. 47A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a flow of the high navigation state processing A according to the modification of the first embodiment, and corresponds to the high navigation state processing A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the high navigation state processing A according to the modification of the first embodiment, the processing in steps S821 and S822 is added to the high navigation state processing A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the BB state. If it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S822, and if not, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S822, BB state process A is executed. In the BB state process A, processes related to the BB game are performed.

<Direction processing>
Next, the rendering process in step S122 in FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating the flow of the effect processing according to the modification of the first embodiment.

  In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example). If so, the process proceeds to step S2103; Proceed to step S2102. In this example, since the LMT state is 20G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (= 20G-1G), but may be another numerical value.

  In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference number counter is equal to or smaller than the LMT shift value B (1840 in this example). If so, the process proceeds to step S2103; The process proceeds to S2104. In this example, the high navigation state is ended when the maximum payout number in the LMT state is 20G, the maximum payout number in the 3-betting game is 11 (the maximum increase number is 8), and the difference number exceeds 2000. Therefore, the LMT shift value B is set to 1840 (= 2000 sheets−8 sheets × 20 G), but may be another numerical value.

  In step S2103, freeze information is set, and in the next step S2104, the effect processing is ended after executing other effect processing.

  In the first embodiment, the freezing state is set when the effect state is the LMT state in the high navigation state common processing A. However, in the modification of the first embodiment, the effect state is the LMT state. Regardless of whether or not the condition is satisfied, the freeze state is set when the condition of step S2101 or step S2102 is satisfied.

<Production state control processing B>
Next, the rendering state control processing B in step S123 in FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a flow of the effect state control process B according to the modification of the first embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the effect state control process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  Steps S1701 to S1704 of the effect state control process B according to the modification of the first embodiment are the same as the effect state control process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. In addition, the description is omitted. In step S1721, after performing other effect state control processing B, effect state control processing B ends. In other effect state control processing B, for example, when the high navigation state end condition is satisfied in the BB state and the state is shifted from the high navigation state to the low navigation state, processing for shifting the effect state from the BB state to the normal state is performed. .

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, the high navigation state process B in step S1705 of FIG. 50 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a flow of the high navigation state processing B according to the modification of the first embodiment, and corresponds to the high navigation state processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the high navigation state processing B according to the modification of the first embodiment, the processing in steps S1821 and S1822 is added to the high navigation state processing B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S1821, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the BB state. If it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S1822, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1822, BB state processing B is performed. In the BB state processing B, processing for returning the effect state to the state immediately before the BB state after the BB state ends is performed.

<Specific examples of various effects, various displays, etc.>
Next, specific examples of various effects, various displays, and the like executed by the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 52 to 78 are timing charts each showing a flow of the effect, and show the effect form of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

  Here, the item of “low / high navigation state” in each figure indicates an AT-based gaming state (in this example, a high navigation state or a low navigation state), and the item of “staging state” in each figure is , An effect state (in this example, a normal state, a fixed notification state, a judge state, a pullback state, an AT1, an AT2 state, or an LMT (limit) state) in each of the AT-related game states. Also, the item of “high navigation state counter” in each figure shows the number of remaining games in the high navigation state, and the item of “production state counter” in each figure shows the number of remaining games in each production state. ing. The item “BET” in each drawing indicates the number of bets (BET numbers) of game media in each game.

<Specific example of counter update display>
First, a specific example of the update display of the counter will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54 are timing charts showing the flow of the effect, respectively, and show the effect form of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

<Specific example of counter update display / 3 betting game only>
FIG. 52 shows that, in the high navigation state, when the effect state shifts in the order of the AT2 state → the judgment state → the LMT state (limit state), and then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, only the three-sheet betting game is performed. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a counter update display at the time.

  The game R28 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 28, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R28, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. , An AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) indicating a stop operation is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (an effect state counter) is executed. Is displayed, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display including the character “LAST 2G”) is executed. .

  Note that the condition for starting the remaining game number (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is not limited to the case where the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received, and for example, until the third stop operation is received. After displaying “LAST 3G” and receiving the third stop operation, the display of “LAST 2G” may be started. In addition, the effect form of the AT2 effect is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a series of effects performed over a plurality of games, or an effect completed in one game. The display mode of the number of remaining games (count value of the production state counter) in the AT2 state is not limited to this example. For example, the number of remaining games (count value of the production state counter) in the AT2 state is represented by the number of icons and the like. May be indicated by

  The following game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R27, while performing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation similarly to the game R28, a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, Display of an image including the characters “LAST 1G”).

  The following game R26 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 26, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R26, an AT2 effect is performed and the operation navigation is executed in the same manner as the games R28 to R27, and a display including an image indicating the remaining game number (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is displayed. In the example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 0G” is executed.

  In addition, in the game R26, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the effect image display device 157 is used as the final game in the AT2 state. , An AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is displayed, and the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of game media obtained) in the AT2 state is executed, while the remaining game number in the AT2 state ( The display including the image indicating the effect state counter value (in this example, the display including the image of “LAST 0G”) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. The conditions for starting the AT2 end screen and the result display are not limited to the case where the third stop operation is received, and the effect form of the AT2 end screen and the display contents of the result display are not particularly limited.

  The following game R25 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 25, the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R25, the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the judge state using the effect image display device 157 until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after a BET, etc.)). Since the transition to the state has started, the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 10, the number of games (effect state counter (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 10G”).

  After that, in the game R25, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is determined to be the judge state using the effect image display device 157. Since the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, and the remaining game number in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9, the image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 9G”). Note that the flow of the effects of the game R24 to the game R20 is almost the same, and a description thereof is omitted.

  The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is changed from the judge state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has been made, an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) indicating a stop operation is executed, and the LMT operation is performed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (effect state counter) Is displayed (in this example, an image including the characters “20/20”) is displayed. Note that the filling of the operation navigation indicates that the stop operation has not been performed yet at the same timing.

  After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R19 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state (In this example, display of an image including the characters "remaining 19/20") including an image indicating the total number of games in and the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the LMT state. I have. Note that the flow of the effects of the game R18 to the game R1 is almost the same, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and is a game in which a three-bet game is performed. In the game R0, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the judge state is 0. A display including an image indicating the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (display of an image including the characters “0/20” in this example) is executed. ing.

  Thereafter, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the game is the final game in the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. While displaying the ED effect end screen (end effect) corresponding to the end of the LMT state, the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of game media obtained or the number of games in the AT2 state) is performed. Then, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) in the LMT state (display of the image including the character “0/20” in this example) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. ing. The conditions for starting the ED effect end screen and the result display are not limited to the case where the third stop operation is received, and the effect mode and the display contents of the result display of the ED effect end screen are not particularly limited.

<Specific example of counter update display / 3-gaming game and 2-gaming game>
FIG. 53 shows a case where the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state to the LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state, and then to the normal state of the low navigation state. It is a figure showing an example of the update display of the counter when playing both games. Note that the effects and displays that are the same as those in “Specific example of counter update display / three-page betting game only” described with reference to FIG. 52 will be appropriately omitted (the same applies to the following embodiments).

  The game R28 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 28, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R28, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. , An AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) indicating a stop operation is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (an effect state counter) is executed. Is displayed, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display including the character “LAST 2G”) is executed. .

  The following game R27 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 27, and is a game in which two bets are played in the AT2 state. In this game R27, the number of remaining games (counter value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state remains at 2 since a two-bet game has been played in the AT2 state.

  For this reason, in the game R27, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is being executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is not updated. Further, since the two-stake betting game is performed in the AT2 state, even when the internal winning is performed in the pushing sequence, the operation navigation indicating the stop operation is not executed. Note that, in this example, an example has been described in which the AT2 effect is executed even when the two-bet game is performed in the AT2 state, but the AT2 effect is executed over a plurality of games. In the case where the game is composed of two scenes, when a game of two bets is played in the AT2 state, the scene of the AT2 effect may not be updated in the game.

  The game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 2, in which a two-bet game is performed. In this game R1, the remaining number of games (counter value of the effect state counter) in the LMT state remains at 2 since the two-bet game has been played in the LMT state.

  For this reason, in the game R1, the effect state is the LMT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the LMT state is not executed. Further, since the two-stake betting game is performed in the LMT state, even when the internal winning is performed in the pushing sequence, the operation navigation indicating the stop operation is not executed. In this example, an example in which the ED effect is executed even when the two-stake betting game is performed in the LMT state has been described. However, the ED effect is executed over a plurality of games. When the LMT state is set, the scene of the ED effect may not be updated in the game when the two betting game is performed in the LMT state.

  In this example, after the first display (in this example, the display of the image including the character “LAST 2G”) is displayed in the advantageous state (AT2 state in this example), the first game (in this example, When the execution of the (three-betting game) is started, the specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state counter) is updated and the second display is performed in the first game (three-betting game). (In this example, display of an image including characters of “LAST 1G”) is configured to be displayable.

  On the other hand, in the advantageous state (AT2 state), after the first display (display of an image including the letters “LAST 2G”) is displayed, the execution of the second game (in this example, the two-bet game) starts. In this case, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated, and the second display (display of an image including the characters “LAST 1G”) is displayed in the second game (two-betting game). It is configured not to be displayed.

  For this reason, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

<Specific example of counter update display / When no judge effect is performed>
FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the updated display of the counter when the judge effect is not performed by the double betting game.

  The game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27, and is a game in which two bets are played in the AT2 state. In this game R27, the number of remaining games (counter value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state remains at 2 since a two-bet game has been played in the AT2 state.

  For this reason, in the game R27, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is being executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is not updated. Further, since the two-stake betting game is performed in the AT2 state, even when the internal winning is performed in the pushing sequence, the operation navigation indicating the stop operation is not executed.

  In this example, since two betting games are played over the period from the game R27 to the game R18, the number of remaining games (counter value of the production state counter) in the AT2 state is not updated and remains at 2. However, since the three-game betting game has been performed in the subsequent game R17, the effect state has shifted to the LMT state without shifting from the AT2 state to the judge state. Therefore, the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is not executed. Further, in this example, since the state has shifted from the AT2 state to the LMT state, the display of the AT2 end screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is not executed.

  The game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17, the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R17, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has been made, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) indicating a stop operation is executed. .

  On the other hand, although the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “20/20”) Display).

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 2, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R0, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , An ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state.

  On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 2 Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the staging state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “remaining 2/20”) Display).

  After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the effect state Although the count value of the counter is 2 but the final game in the high navigation state, the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is displayed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, a game medium) While displaying the number of acquired games, the number of games in the AT2 state, and the like, while displaying an image indicating the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, “remaining 2/20”). Display of images containing the characters ")" and the display of the operation navigation.

  In this example, in the game after the transition to the LMT state, the player plays a bet game of three, but in the AT2 state immediately before the bet game, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the effect state counter). Of the game in the high navigation state (the count value of the high navigation state counter) is not consumed. As a result, the shift to the LMT state in the high navigation state is delayed, and the game shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state without being able to complete a part of the game in the LMT state.

<Specific example of counter update display / Judge production and ED production not performed>
FIG. 54B is a diagram showing an example of an updated display of the counter when the judge effect and the ED effect are not performed by the two-page betting game.

  The game R27 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 27, and is a game in which two bets are played in the AT2 state. In this game R27, the number of remaining games (counter value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state remains at 2 since a two-bet game has been played in the AT2 state.

  For this reason, in the game R27, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is being executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is not updated. Further, since the two-stake betting game is performed in the AT2 state, even when the internal winning is performed in the pushing sequence, the operation navigation indicating the stop operation is not executed.

  In this example, since two betting games are performed over the period from the game R27 to the game R0, the remaining number of games (counter value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is not updated and remains at 2. The effect state shifts from the high navigation state to the low navigation state without shifting from the AT2 state to the judge state or the LMT state. Therefore, the judge effect corresponding to the judge state and the ED effect corresponding to the LMT state are not executed. Further, in this example, since the AT2 state has shifted to the low navigation state, the display of the AT2 end screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state and the display of the judge end screen corresponding to the end of the judge state are not executed.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high-navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2, and a two-bet game is performed. In the game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the effect state counter) is displayed using the effect image display device 157. Is 2), which is the final game in the high-navigation state, so that the ED effect ending screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is not displayed although the game has not shifted to the LMT state, and the high-navigation state is displayed. (For example, the display of the number of game media obtained, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.), while the AT2 effect has been completed.

  In this example, since two bets are played over the period from the game R27 to the game R0, the remaining number of games (count value of the production state counter) in the AT2 state is not exhausted, and the high navigation state is performed. Only the number of remaining games in (the count value of the high navigation state counter) has been consumed. As a result, the transition to the judge state or the LMT state in the high navigation state is not performed, and the game shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state without being able to complete all the games in the LMT state (20 games in this example). I have.

<Examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production>
Next, specific examples of the ED effect, the freeze effect, and the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 55 to 58 are timing charts showing the flow of the effects, respectively, and show the effect modes of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

<Examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / 3 betting games only>
FIG. 55 shows the ED when only the three-bet gaming is performed when the effect state shifts from the judge state to the LMT state (limit state) in the order of the high navigation state and then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state. It is a figure showing an example of an effect and a freeze effect.

  The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a three-bet game is performed. In this game R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a press operation of the start lever 135 is received), the freeze effect is started, and at the same time, the effect state is displayed using the effect image display device 157. Has shifted from the judge state to the LMT state, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” Display), and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, so that the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number in the LMT state Including an image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, including the characters of “20/20”) Running the display) of the image.

  After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R19 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state (In this example, display of an image including the characters "remaining 19/20") including an image indicating the total number of games in and the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the LMT state. I have. Note that the flow of the effects of the subsequent games R18 to R2 is substantially the same, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, in which a three-bet game is performed. In the game R1, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , An ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 1. A display including an image indicating the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including characters of “1/20”) is executed. ing. Further, in the game R1, a setting suggestion effect (a setting value can be guessed) using the effect image display device 157, which indicates a setting value (setting 1 to setting 6) indicated by reference sign A or “suggestion A” in the figure. Directing). The effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed so as to overlap a part of the ED effect.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and is a game in which a three-bet game is performed. In the game R0, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the judge state is 0. A display including an image indicating the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (display of an image including the characters “0/20” in this example) is executed. ing.

  Thereafter, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the game is the final game in the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state, the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, display of the number of game media acquired, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is performed, while the LMT state is displayed. In this example, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in the present example, the display of the image including the characters “0/20”) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, in the game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect capable of estimating the setting value) indicated by a symbol B or “suggestion B” in the figure, which indicates a setting value. . The effect of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed in a part of the background display. Further, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and the suggestion A and the suggestion B may be simultaneously performed in the final game in the LMT state.

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / 3-gaming game and 2-gaming game>
FIG. 56 (a) shows a case where the effect state shifts from the judge state to the LMT state (limit state) in the order of the high navigation state, and then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, where three betting games and two betting are performed. It is a figure showing an example of ED production and freeze production at the time of playing a game.

  The game R19 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 19, and a game in which two bets are played in the judge state. In this game R19, the number of remaining games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated, and remains at 4, since two bets are played in the judge state.

  Therefore, in the game R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the judge state using the effect image display device 157. Therefore, while the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the judge state is not updated. In the game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, which satisfies the condition of transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but it is a two-bet game. Therefore, the ED production and the freeze production are not performed.

  Note that, in this example, an example in which the judge effect is executed even when the two betting game is performed in the judge state has been described, but a plurality of relevant judge effects are executed over a plurality of games. In the case where a two-bet game is performed in the judge state, the judge effect scene may not be updated in the game.

  The following game R18 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 18, the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R18, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the freeze effect is started, and at the same time, the effect state is displayed using the effect image display device 157. Has shifted from the judge state to the LMT state, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” Display).

  On the other hand, although the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 18, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “20/20”) Display).

  Thereafter, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R18 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157, Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the judge state is 19, so that the high navigation is performed. The number of games in the state (the count value of the high navigation state counter) is 18, but a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (book) In the example, display of an image including the character of “19/20” is executed. The flow of the effects of the subsequent games R17 to R1 is almost the same, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, in which a three-bet game is performed. In the game R0, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , An ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state.

  On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 1. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “1/20” remaining) Display). Further, in the game R0, using the effect image display device 157, a setting suggestion effect (effect capable of estimating the setting value) indicated by reference sign A or “suggestion A” in the figure, which indicates the setting value, is executed. . The effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed so as to overlap a part of the ED effect.

  Thereafter, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the game is the final game in the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state, the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, display of the number of game media acquired, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is performed, while the LMT state is displayed. In this example, the display including the image indicating the remaining number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the character of “1/20”) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, in the game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect capable of estimating the setting value) indicated by a symbol B or “suggestion B” in the figure, which indicates a setting value. . The effect of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed in a part of the background display. Further, the display timing of the ED effect end screen is not limited to this example, and the display may be started when another condition is satisfied, such as when a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received.

  In the present example, execution of a specific effect (in this example, ED effect) can be started in an advantageous state (in this example, the LMT state), and a certain requirement is satisfied at the time of starting the execution of the game. In this case (in this example, when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state becomes 20G), if the game is the first game (in this example, a three-bet game), a specific count value In the example, the high navigation state counter is updated so that execution of a specific effect (ED effect) can be started in the first game (three-betting game).

  On the other hand, when a certain requirement is satisfied when the execution of the game is started (when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state has reached 20 G), the game is a second game (in this example, a two-bet game). In this case, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated so that the execution of the specific effect (ED effect) is not started in the second game (three-betting game). For this reason, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In this example, the execution of a certain freeze effect can be started in the advantageous state (in this example, the LMT state), and when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of the execution of the game (in this example, the high In the case where the number of remaining games in the navigation state becomes 20G, if the game is the first game (in this example, a three-bet game), a specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state counter) ) Is updated so that execution of a certain freeze effect can be started in the first game (three-betting game).

  On the other hand, when a certain requirement is satisfied when the execution of the game is started (when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state has reached 20 G), the game is a second game (in this example, a two-bet game). In this case, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated so that the execution of a certain freeze effect is not started in the second game (three-betting game). For this reason, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In this example, the game after the transition to the LMT state is a three-betting game, but the two-betting game is performed in the immediately preceding judge state. The remaining game number (the count value of the high navigation state counter) in the high navigation state is consumed without the count value of the state counter being exhausted. As a result, the shift to the LMT state in the high navigation state is delayed, and the game shifts to the normal state in the low navigation state without being able to complete a part of the game in the LMT state.

  FIG. 56 (b) is a diagram showing a modification of the setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 56 (a). In the present example, in the game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, and in the game R18, the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 18, and the conditions for shifting from the judge state to the LMT state are respectively provided. (The remaining number of games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed because the game is a two-stake betting game.

  Further, since two betting games are performed in the game R19 and the game R18 in the judge state, the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the staging state counter) is not exhausted, and high navigation is performed. Only the remaining number of games in the state (the count value of the high navigation state counter) is consumed, and the number of games in the LMT state is 18. For this reason, the setting suggestion effect (suggestion A) executed in response to the nineteenth game in the LMT state is not executed, but the ED effect of the final game in the high navigation state (the LMT state when shifting to the LMT state). Only the setting suggestion effect (suggestion B) executed when the end screen is displayed is executed.

<Examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / 2 betting games only>
FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of the setting suggestion effect when the two-swing betting game is continued in the judge state of the high navigation state.

  The games R25 to R19 are games in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 25 to 19, and are games in which two bets are played in the judge state. In the period from game R25 to game R19, since two betting games are performed in the judge state, the number of remaining games (counter value of the effect state counter) in the judge state is not updated and remains nine.

  For this reason, in the game R25 to the game R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is judged using the effect image display device 157. Since the state is the state, while the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the judge state is not updated. In the game R19, the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, which satisfies the condition of transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but it is a two-bet game. Therefore, the ED production and the freeze production are not performed.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 9, and a two-bet game is performed. In the game R0, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the judge state using the effect image display device 157. , A judge effect corresponding to the judge state is being performed.

  Thereafter, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the game is the final game in the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. While displaying the ED production end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and executing the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of game media acquired or the number of games in the AT2 state), the judge state In this example, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the image including the character “LAST 9G”) and the display of the judge effect are deleted. Further, in the game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect capable of estimating the setting value) indicated by a symbol B or “suggestion B” in the figure, which indicates a setting value. .

  In this example, since the two betting game is continued in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is not consumed from the remaining nine games, and the remaining number in the high navigation state is not consumed. Only the number of games (count value of the high navigation state counter) is consumed. As a result, the game is not shifted to the LMT state in the high navigation state, and the game is shifted to the normal state in the low navigation state without being able to complete all the games in the LMT state.

  Further, since the game has not shifted to the LMT state, the setting suggestion effect (suggestion A) executed at the 19th game in the LMT state is not executed. Only the setting suggestion effect (suggestion B) executed when the display of the ED effect end screen of the last game in the (LMT state) is executed is executed.

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / Modifications of freeze production>
FIGS. 58A and 58B are diagrams showing an example of a modification of the freeze effect. In this example, another freeze effect different from the freeze effect performed simultaneously with the ED effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “second freeze effect”) is configured to be executable.

  FIG. 58 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the second freeze effect in a case where a three-page betting game is performed. The game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 31, and a three-bet game is performed. In this game R327, an effect for managing the number of games until the game in which the second freeze effect is started is triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the start condition of the linked effect is satisfied). Start counting by the start counter.

  The game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 229, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in the present example, a three-betting game is started, and the effect start counter that has started counting in the game R327 reaches a certain value), The linked effect performed over the game R327 to the game R326 is terminated (or interrupted), and the second freeze effect is started without executing the ED effect.

  In this example, since the 200G AT was added in the game R325, an image including the number of added games of the AT is displayed (in this example, "+ 200G !!") after the end of the second freeze effect. (Display of an image including the character of “)”, and when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the effect state is changed using the effect image display device 157. Since the state is the AT2 state, an AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the remaining game number (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is 229. (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 229G”).

  On the other hand, FIG. 58 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a second freeze effect in a case where a double bet game is performed in the middle of the AT2 state. The game R325 of the present example is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and a two-bet game is performed. In the game R325, since the two-bet game has been performed in the AT2 state, the remaining game number (counter value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is not updated and remains at 30.

  For this reason, in the game R325, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Therefore, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is being executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is not updated.

  The following game R324 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 324 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 229, and a game in which three bets are played. In this game R324, when a certain condition is satisfied (in the present example, a three-betting game is started, and the effect start counter that has started counting in the game R327 becomes a certain value), The linked effect performed over the game R327 to the game R325 is ended (or interrupted), and the second freeze effect is started without executing the ED effect. The flow of the effect after the second freeze effect is the same as the flow of the effect of the game R325 in FIG.

<Specific example of ED production in non-AT state>
Next, a specific example of the ED effect in the non-AT state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 59 to FIG. 60 are timing charts each showing a flow of the effect, and show the effect form of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of the ED effect in a case where a three-stake betting game is performed. The game R550 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 550, the number of remaining games in the AT1 state which has shifted from the normal state is 19, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R550, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the AT1 state using the effect image display device 157. , An AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state is executed, and an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) indicating a stop operation is executed, and the remaining number of games in the AT1 state (effect state counter) Since the count value of the game is 19, display including an image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 19G”) is executed. .

  The game R50 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 50, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state shifted from the AT1 state is 24, in which a three-bet game is performed. In the game R50, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. , An AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) indicating a stop operation is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (an effect state counter) is executed. Is displayed, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display including the character “LAST 24G”) is executed. .

  The game R19 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 19, the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has been made, an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) indicating a stop operation is executed, and the LMT operation is performed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (effect state counter) Is displayed (in this example, an image including the characters “20/20”) is displayed.

  The game R1 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 1, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1, in which a three-bet game is performed. In the game R1, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , An ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 1. A display including an image indicating the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including characters of “1/20”) is executed. ing. Further, in the game R1, a setting suggestion effect (an effect capable of estimating the setting value) indicating a setting value, which is indicated by a symbol A or “suggestion A” in the figure, is performed using the effect image display device 157. .

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0, and is a game in which a three-bet game is performed. In the game R0, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the judge state is 0. A display including an image indicating the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (display of an image including the characters “0/20” in this example) is executed. ing.

  Thereafter, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the game is the final game in the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state, the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, display of the number of game media acquired, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is performed, while the LMT state is displayed. In this example, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in the present example, the display of the image including the characters “0/20”) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Further, in the game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect capable of estimating the setting value) indicated by a symbol B or “suggestion B” in the figure, which indicates a setting value. .

  FIG. 60A is a diagram illustrating an example of the ED effect in a case where the game shifts to the LMT state after performing the two-stake betting game in the normal state. The game R900 to the game R18 are games in the normal state in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 900 to 18, and are games in which a two-bet game is performed. In games R19 to R18, the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 19 to 18, which satisfies the condition of transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but two bets are placed. Since it is a game, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

  The following game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17, the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the normal state is 19, and a three-bet game is performed. In this game R17, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the ED effect is started, and at the same time, the effect state is displayed using the effect image display device 157. Has transitioned from the normal state to the LMT state, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” Display).

  On the other hand, although the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “20/20”) Display).

  Thereafter, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R17 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the effect state is the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the judge state is 19, so that the high navigation is performed. The number of games in the state (the count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (book) In the example, display of an image including the character of “19/20” is executed. Note that the flow of the effects of the subsequent games R16 to R1 is substantially the same, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 2, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R0, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , An ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state.

  On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 2 Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the staging state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “remaining 2/20”) Display) is running.

  Thereafter, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the game is the final game in the LMT state by using the effect image display device 157. The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state (end effect relating to the end of the AT2 state (= high navigation state)) is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media, While displaying the number of games in the AT2 state, the display including the image indicating the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the LMT state (in this example, the image including the characters “remaining 2/20”) Display) and the operation navigation display are deleted. Further, in the game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect capable of estimating the setting value) indicated by a symbol B or “suggestion B” in the figure, which indicates a setting value. .

  In the present example, in the advantageous state (in this example, the high navigation state), it is possible to shift to the first advantageous game state (in this example, the AT2 state (= high navigation state)), and the first advantageous game is provided. An end effect (display of an ED effect end screen in this example) relating to the end of the state (AT2 state (= high navigation state)) is configured to be executable, and the first game (the high navigation state) is executed in the advantageous state (high navigation state). In the present example, when only three betting games are performed, the game proceeds to the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) and the end effect may be executed. When only the second game (in this example, the two betting game) is performed in the (high navigation state), the end effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state (AT2 state). It is configured to:

  For this reason, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player by notifying that the advantageous state has ended for the game in which the second game is being played. In addition, by giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in a subsequent game.

  In this example, the state transitions from the normal state to the LMT state without transitioning to a state other than the LMT state (such as the AT1 state or the AT2 state). The production is running.

  FIG. 60 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the ED effect in the case where the two-page bet game is continued in the normal state.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the normal state is 0, and a game in which two bets are played. In the game R0, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the normal state using the effect image display device 157. , A normal effect corresponding to the normal state is being executed.

  Thereafter, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the final game is in the high navigation state using the effect image display device 157. While displaying the ED production end screen corresponding to the end of the high navigation state and executing the result display 2 in the high navigation state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media, etc.), the display of the normal production is performed. I am erasing. Further, in the game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect capable of estimating the setting value) indicated by a symbol B or “suggestion B” in the figure, which indicates a setting value. .

  In this example, in the high navigation state, the state transitions to the low navigation state without transitioning to a state other than the normal state (such as the AT1 state or the AT2 state). However, the ED effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed.

<Specific example of ED production during BB internal election>
Next, a specific example of the ED effect during the BB internal winning is described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing the flow of the effect, and shows the effect form of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

  FIG. 61A is a diagram illustrating an example of the ED effect performed after the BB game. In order to avoid redundant description, only effects different from the effects described with reference to FIG. 59 will be described.

  The game R580 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 580 and the BB is internally won in the normal state. In the game R580, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a bet operation is received), the effect state is set to the normal state using the effect image display device 157, and the state is changed to the normal state. In addition to executing the corresponding normal effect, a BB finalizing effect (in this example, displaying an image including the character "bonus finalizing!") Indicating the internal winning of the BB is executed.

  Thereafter, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R580 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the stop image-related stop operation is suggested using the effect image display device 157. An operation navigation (in this example, a navigation suggesting that a symbol combination "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1" corresponding to BB (bonus combination) is aimed at) is executed.

  The following game R579 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 579 and a BB is won in the normal state. In the game R579, the effect image display is triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the symbol combination “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1” corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed on the winning line). By using the device 157, a BB effect for notifying the start of the BB game is started.

  FIG. 61 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the ED effect performed during the BB internal winning. In addition, in order to avoid redundant description, only effects that are different from the effects described with reference to FIG. 61B will be described.

  The game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the BB is being internally won. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the final image is in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the state (end effect relating to the end of the AT2 state (= high navi state)) is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media). Running.

  Further, in this game R0, using the effect image display device 157, the operation navigation (in this example, the symbol combination “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1” corresponding to BB (bonus role)) suggesting a stop operation related to BB winning. ) Is continued, and a setting suggestion effect (an effect capable of estimating the setting value) indicated by reference sign B or “suggestion B” in the figure is performed. .

  In this example, it is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (a certain gaming state) (in this example, the AT2 state) in an advantageous state (in this example, a high navigation state). The end effect (end effect) (display of the ED effect end screen) in the present example is configured to be executable, and in an advantageous state (high navigation state), the game shifts to a certain gaming state (AT2 state) and ends. (Display of ED production end screen) is configured to be able to start, and when a game is played in the advantageous state (high navigating state) and the internal winning of a special role, the advantageous state ( In the high navigation state), execution of the end effect (display of the ED effect end screen) can be started without shifting to a certain gaming state (AT2 state).

  For this reason, even if the advantageous state is over without the symbols related to the special role being arranged, by making the player feel like having shifted to a certain advantageous gaming state, the player's disappointment and impatience can be reduced. It becomes possible. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

<Example of linked production>
Next, a specific example of the linked effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 63 are timing charts each showing a flow of the effect, and show the effect of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the linked effect in chronological order.

<Specific example of linked production / When linked production proceeds normally>
FIG. 62 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of an effect when the linked effect proceeds normally.
Here, the linked effect is an effect composed of a plurality of scenes having relevance (story) and executed over a plurality of games. Although the production mode of the linked production is not particularly limited, the linked production (normal pattern) of this example is, as shown in FIG. 64A, a scene of “enemy selection” indicated by reference numeral N and an “enemy decision” indicated by reference numeral N + 1. , A confrontation scene, an “enemy attack” scene indicated by reference numeral N + 2, a “friend attack” scene indicated by reference numeral N + 3 → a “victory (or defeat)” scene indicated by reference numeral N + 4, and the like.

  Returning to FIG. 62, the game R90 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 90 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 9, and a three-bet game is performed. In this game R90, a scene of “enemy selection” is executed as one scene of the linked effect. Although illustration is omitted, in the subsequent period of the game R89 to the game R85, one scene of an interlocking effect is executed in each game since the three-betting game is performed, and the interlocking effect proceeds normally.

  The subsequent games R86 to R83 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 83 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5-2, in which a three-bet game is performed. During the period from the game R86 to the game R83, as the continuation of the linked effect, a scene of “enemy decision, confrontation” → a scene of “enemy attack” → a scene of “ally attack” → a scene of “victory” is executed in this order. The linked production has been executed until the last scene.

<Specific example of linked production / When linked production does not normally proceed>
FIG. 62 (b) is a diagram showing a flow of the effect when the linked effect does not normally proceed.
The games R86 to R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and in which a three-bet game is performed. During the period from the game R86 to the game R85, as the linked effect, a scene of “enemy determination and confrontation” → a scene of “enemy attack” is executed in this order, and the linked effect proceeds normally.

  The following game R84 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84, and two bets are played in the judge state. In this game R84, the number of remaining games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4 since two bets are played in the judge state.

  For this reason, in the game R84, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the judge state using the effect image display device 157. For this reason, while performing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state, a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the judge state (in this example, including the characters “LAST 4G”) Display) has not been updated. Further, since the two-game bet game is performed during the linked effect in the judge state, the scene of the "enemy attack" executed in the immediately preceding game R85 is executed again without proceeding with the linked effect scene. Therefore, in this example, the same scene of the “enemy attack” is repeatedly executed in both the game R85 and the game R84, and the linked effect does not normally proceed. However, in the subsequent game R83 to game R82, a three-bet game was performed, and during the period of the game R83 to game R82, the scene of “ally attack” → the scene of “win” Are executed in this order, and the linked effect is executed up to the last scene.

  In this example, a certain effect (first effect) (in this example, a judge effect) is configured to be executable over a plurality of games, and the first effect (judge effect) is a first scene. The production of the first scene (the scene of "enemy attack"), including the production of the scene of "enemy attack" in this example and the production of the second scene (the scene of "enemy attack" in this example) If the execution of the first game (in this example, three-betting game) is started after the game in which the game has been performed, the second scene (“friend”) in the first game (three-betting game) The execution of the performance of the “attack” scene) can be started, and after the game in which the production of the first scene (the “enemy attack” scene) is performed, the second game (in this example, two cards) When the execution of the betting game is started, the second scene (“friend attack”) in the second game (double betting game) is started. Execution of the effect of the scene) is configured so as not to start.

  For this reason, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player.

FIG. 63 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of the effect when the ED effect is started without the linked effect proceeding normally.
The games R86 to R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and in which a three-bet game is performed. During the period from the game R86 to the game R85, as the linked effect, a scene of “enemy determination and confrontation” → a scene of “enemy attack” is executed in this order, and the linked effect proceeds normally.

  The following games R84 to R18 are games in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 84 to 18, and two bets are played in the judge state. In the period from game R84 to game R18, since two betting games are performed in the judge state, the number of remaining games (counter value of the effect state counter) in the judge state remains at 4 without being updated.

  For this reason, in the game R84 to the game R18, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is judged using the effect image display device 157. Since the state is the state, while performing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state, a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the judge state (in this example, “LAST 4G”). Not include text). Further, since the two-betting game was performed during the linked production in the judge state, the scene of the linked production is not advanced and the scene of the “enemy attack” executed in the immediately preceding game R85 is continuously executed. . Therefore, in the present example, the same “enemy attack” scene is repeatedly executed during the period from the game R85 to the game R18, and the linked effect does not normally proceed.

  The following game R17 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 17, the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a three-bet game is performed. In this game R17, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the ED effect is started, and at the same time, the effect state is displayed using the effect image display device 157. Has shifted from the judge state to the LMT state, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and the operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” Display).

  On the other hand, although the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “20/20”) Display).

  In this example, the same “enemy attack” scene was repeatedly executed during the period from game R85 to game R18, and the linked effect did not normally proceed. It has been started, and the linked effect has not been executed until the last scene (in this example, the “victory” or “defeat” scene of the linked effect that functions as a notice of a subsequent game).

  FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the linked effect in the case where the two-swing betting game is continued in the judge state.

  The games R86 to R85 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and in which a three-bet game is performed. During the period from the game R86 to the game R85, as the linked effect, a scene of “enemy determination and confrontation” → a scene of “enemy attack” is executed in this order, and the linked effect proceeds normally.

  The subsequent games R84 to R1 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 84 to 1 and two bets are played in the judge state. In the period from the game R84 to the game R1, since the two betting games are performed in the judge state, the number of remaining games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at four.

  For this reason, in the game R84 to the game R1, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is judged using the effect image display device 157. Since the state is the state, while performing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state, a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the judge state (in this example, “LAST 4G”). Not include text).

  Further, since the two-betting game was performed during the linked production in the judge state, the scene of the linked production is not advanced and the scene of the “enemy attack” executed in the immediately preceding game R85 is continuously executed. . Therefore, in the present example, during the period of the game R85 to the game R1, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the same “enemy attack” scene is executed repeatedly, and the linked effect does not normally proceed. For this reason, the player can easily notice that the two-player bet game has been performed by observing the progress of the linked effect.

  The following game R0 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 0 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 4, and a two-bet game is performed. In the game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the final game in the high navigation state is performed using the effect image display device 157. , An ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the high navigation state is displayed, and the result display 2 (for example, the display of the number of game media acquired) in the high navigation state is executed, while the judge effect is displayed. Has been erased. Further, in the game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect capable of estimating the setting value) indicated by a symbol B or “suggestion B” in the figure, which indicates a setting value. .

  In this example, the same “enemy attack” scene is repeatedly executed during the period of the game R85 to the game R1, and the linked effect does not normally proceed. Therefore, the high navigation state ends in the game R0 and the ED effect is performed. Has been started, and the linked effect has not been executed up to the last scene (in this example, the "victory" or "defeat" scene of the linked effect that functions as a notice of a subsequent game). For this reason, the player can easily notice that the two-player bet game has been performed by observing the progress of the linked effect.

  FIGS. 64 (B) to 64 (D) are diagrams showing modified examples of the linked effect. The linked effect according to the present invention is not limited to the linked effect described with reference to FIG. 64 (A). For example, as indicated by reference numeral N in FIG. 64 (B), the “enemy selection” scene and the “enemy determination” The scene of "confrontation" may be composed of one scene.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (C), a scene of “enemy attack and ally attack” is newly added, and as shown by reference numeral N + 1 in FIG. 64 (C), a scene of “enemy attack and ally attack” And the scene of "enemy attack" and the scene of "enemy attack and ally attack" and the scene of "ally attack" as shown by the symbol N + 2 in FIG. You may.

  Further, after executing the scene of “enemy attack and ally attack” composed of one scene as shown by reference numeral N + 1 in FIG. 64 (D), one scene as shown by reference numeral N + 2 in FIG. 64 (D) May be executed.

  Further, depending on the type of the linked effect shown in FIGS. 64 (A) to 64 (D), the contents of the privilege given to the player may be changed or the degree of expectation may be changed. In addition, even when a two-betting game is performed, all scenes may be executed without fail in a certain aspect of the linked effect. (Or the last scene suggesting a judge result (eg, a “win” or “defeat” scene)) may not be played.

<Specific example of specific display>
Next, a specific example of the specific display will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. FIG. 65 to FIG. 66 are timing charts each showing a flow of the effect, and show the effect form of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of the specific display in chronological order.

<Specific example of specific display / Three-game bet at judge transition>
FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of an effect when a three-betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state.

  The game R82 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 82, the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R82, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. , An AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state (for example, an effect indicated by reference numeral d1 in FIG. 67 (A), in which the character of the palace is running), and an operation navigation (in this example, “2 -1-3 ”is displayed, and since the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is 1, an image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) is included. Display (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 1G”) is performed.

  In the game R82, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state (in the example indicated by the symbol d1 in FIG. 67 (A), the characters “GET 1320” are included). Display), and when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), it is suggested that the third stop operation is received using the effect image display device 157. (For example, an effect of darkening the entire screen, which is indicated by reference numeral d1 ′ in FIG. 67A).

  The following game R81 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high-navigation state is 81 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R81, an AT2 effect is performed and the operation navigation is executed in the same manner as the game R82, while a display including an image indicating the remaining game number (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, Display of an image including the characters “LAST 0G”).

  In addition, in the game R81, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the game is the final game in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. , The display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state (for example, a background image including the character of “end” indicated by reference numeral d2 in FIG. 67 (A)), and displaying the result 1 in the AT2 state. For example, an image showing the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state while executing the display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state (indicated by d2 in FIG. 67A). In this example, the display including the characters (“LAST 0G” in this example) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. In this example, the example in which the display of the AT2 end effect screen is performed in the final game in the AT2 state has been described. However, the display may be performed at another timing (for example, after shifting to the judge state).

  The following game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80, the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R80, the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the judge state by using the effect image display device 157 until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until a press operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)). Since the transition to the state has started, the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 10, the number of games (effect state counter (In this example, display of an image including the character “defeat within 10 G”) is performed.

  After that, in the game R80, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is determined to be the judge state using the effect image display device 157. Since the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, and the remaining game number in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9, the image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 9G”).

  Here, an example of a judge effect performed in the game R80 will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, when a press operation of the start lever 135 is received, a judge effect start screen indicated by reference sign d3 is displayed, and when a first stop operation is received in the game, a judge effect (interlocking effect effect) indicated by reference sign d4 is displayed. Is performed, which is a scene of “enemy selection”, which is one scene of the game, and a third stop operation is received in the game. (A scene of “enemy selection”, which is one scene of the linked performance, a performance indicating that the enemy has been selected), and a certain time has elapsed since the third stop operation was received in the game Then, a judge effect indicated by reference sign d4 '' (a scene indicating “enemy selection”, which is one scene of the interlocking effect, indicating that the enemy has been determined) is executed.

<Specific example of specific display / Two betting game at judge transition>
FIG. 65 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of an effect when a two-bet game is performed when the effect state changes from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. Note that the flow of the effects of the game R82 to the game R81 and the game R79 is substantially the same as the effect described with reference to FIG.

  The game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80, and a two-bet game is performed. In this game R80, since two betting games were performed in the judge state, a display including an image indicating the judge effect corresponding to the judge state and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. Without performing the operation, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the specific display (in this example, a black-colored display) is performed using the effect image display device 157. Display including only the background image).

  Here, the “specific display (specific display)” refers to a display that is not related to the advantageous state, for example, a display (for example, displayed at the end of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state)). A display different from any of the AT2 end screen display) and a certain display (for example, a judge effect) corresponding to the second advantageous game state (for example, a judge state) corresponds to the display. The display mode of the specific display is not particularly limited. For example, the specific display is an image display including a certain character (in this example, a character “preparing for production”) indicated by reference numeral d5. Or a display composed of a certain pattern, figure, or the like.

  In this example, in the judge state, a three-betting game is performed after a two-betting game is performed. However, if the two-betting game is continued, certain conditions are also satisfied in the two-betting game. When the establishment is achieved (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the specific display is displayed using the effect image display device 157. In this case, the display of the AT2 end screen may be executed until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until an operation of pressing the start lever 135 is received). With such a configuration, even when the specific display is displayed, the player can know the end of the AT2 state, and can improve the convenience of the player.

<Specific Example of Specific Display / Modified Example of Three-Betting Game at Judge Transition>
FIG. 66 (a) is a diagram showing a modification of the flow of the effect when a three-betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state.

  The game R81 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 81 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R81, as in the game R82, an AT2 effect (for example, an effect indicated by a symbol d1 in FIG. 67 (A), in which a character of the lord is running) is performed, and the operation navigation is executed. A display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) (display of an image including the characters “LAST 0G” in this example) is executed.

  In the game R81, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state (in the example indicated by the symbol d1 in FIG. 67A, the characters “GET 1320” are included). Display), and when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the effect image display device 157 is used to trigger the final game in the AT2 state. While displaying an AT2 end effect screen (for example, a background image including a character of “end” indicated by reference numeral d2 in FIG. 67A) corresponding to the end of the AT2 state, the result display 1 in the AT2 state is displayed. Not running.

  The following game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80, the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R80, the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, the display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state, the display including the characters of “GET 1328”, indicated by reference numeral d2 in FIG. 67A) is executed. are doing.

<Specific Example of Specific Display / Modification of Two-Betting Game at Judge Transition>
FIG. 66 (b) is a diagram showing a modification of the flow of production when a two-bet game is performed when the production state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. The flow of the effect of the game R81 is substantially the same as the effect described with reference to FIG.

  The game R80 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 80, and a two-bet game is performed. In this game R80, since two betting games were performed in the judge state, a display including an image indicating the judge effect corresponding to the judge state and the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. Without performing the operation, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the specific display (in this example, a black-colored display) is performed using the effect image display device 157. Display including only the background image).

  Further, in the game R81, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, as indicated by reference numeral d2 in FIG. 67B). As shown in the figure, the display of the number of game media acquired in the high-navigation state, that is, the display including the characters "GET 1326 (1328-2) because losing was won by hanging two)".

  In the present example, in the advantageous state (in this example, the high navigation state), it is possible to shift to the first advantageous game state (in this example, the AT2 state) and the second advantageous game state (in this example, the judge state). The first advantageous game state (AT2 state) is more advantageous for the player than the second advantageous game state (judge state), and the first advantageous game state (AT2 state) is provided. After the game is over, the game can be shifted to the second advantageous game state (judgment state), and the display means (the effect image display device 157 in this example) displays the first display (AT2 end screen in this example). ), A second display (in this example, a judge effect), and a third display (in this example, a specific display (display including only a blackened background image)). The display indicates the end of the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state). The second display is a certain display corresponding to the second advantageous game state (judgment state), and the third display is a specific display not related to the advantageous state (high navigation state). When the execution of the first game (in this example, a three-stake betting game) is started after the first display is displayed, a specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state) Counter is updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, and after the first display is displayed, execution of the second game (in this example, a two-stake betting game) Is started, the specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state counter) is updated, and the third display can be displayed in the game.

  For this reason, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. Since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, a game in the next game state can be enjoyed comfortably while the first game is being correctly performed.

  FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (D) are diagrams showing specific examples of the flow of the effect including the specific display. In the above-described embodiment, the effects shown in FIGS. (A) and (B) are mainly applied. However, the linked effects according to the present invention are not limited to these effects. For example, the effects shown in FIGS. As indicated by reference numeral d6 in FIG. (D), instead of displaying the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state, the number of game media acquired in a certain effect state (AT2 state in this example) is displayed. Is also good.

<Specific examples of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter>
Next, a specific example of updating the ceiling counter and the promotion counter will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 68 to 74 are timing charts each showing a flow of the effect, and show the effect form of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

  Here, the item of “ceiling counter” in each figure indicates the number of remaining games until the game reaches the ceiling. In each figure, “promotion counter”, “AT1 type”, “judgment mode”, and “confirmation notification flag” indicate variables, flags, etc. (internal information of the slot machine) in the above-described various flowcharts, respectively. The item of “condition device” in each drawing is the No. of the condition device in FIG. (Number).

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and the promotion counter / When reaching the ceiling by playing three bets>
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the three games are played in the high navigation state and the ceiling is reached, and the effect state transitions in the order of the normal state, the fixed notification state, and the AT1 state.

  The game R300 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 300, the number of remaining games in the normal state is 4, and a three-bet game is performed. In this game R300, since the ceiling counter after the subtraction has reached a certain value (0 in this example), it is determined that the ceiling has been reached, and as a normal effect, a sign effect indicating that the state shifts to the AT1 state. Has begun. Further, in the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19, since the ceiling counter after the subtraction has reached a certain value (0 in this example), the AT1 type lottery is performed, and the AT1 winning flag is turned on. It is ready to be set and the effect state is shifted to the AT1 state. Although not shown, in the subsequent period of the game R299 to the game R297, the precursor effect is continued as a normal effect.

  The following game R296 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 296, and the number of remaining games in the normal state is 0, and a three-bet game is performed. In this game R296, since the effect state counter has become 0 in the normal state (since the normal state has ended), preparations are made to shift the effect state from the normal state to the confirmation notification state, and the normal effect , An indication effect indicating that a transition to the AT1 state is being performed.

  The following game R295 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 295, and the game is in the final notification state immediately after the transition from the normal state, and in which a three-player betting game is performed. In this game R295, as a normal effect, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the character “bonus confirmation!”) For notifying the transition to the AT1 state (in this example, a pseudo bonus) is executed. In this game R295, in the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, since the AT1 type is low, the promotion counter addition lottery is performed, and a determination as to whether to promote the AT1 type is made. After that, in the confirmation notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, a process of setting the confirmation notification flag from off to on is performed.

  The following game R294 is the second game in the confirmed notification state in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 294, and is a game in which a three-bet game is performed. In this game R294, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the character “bonus confirmation!”) Is continued as a normal effect. In the game R294, in the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, since the AT1 type is low, the promotion counter addition lottery is performed, and a determination as to whether to promote the AT1 type is made. After that, a display relating to the promotion lottery of the AT1 type (promotion lottery display) is performed.

  Further, in this game R294, in the finalization notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, since the finalization notification flag is on, the condition device has the internal winning result of the AT1 type (in this example, No. 3 or No. 3). No. 4). In this example, the condition device is No. Since it was 5, the production state is maintained in the confirmed notification state.

  The following game R293 is the third game in the confirmed notification state in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 293, and is a game in which three betting games are performed. In this game R293, the bonus confirmation display (display including the character “bonus confirmation!” In this example) is continued as a normal effect. Further, in this game R293, in the finalized notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, since the AT1 type is low, the promotion counter addition lottery is performed, and a determination as to whether to promote the AT1 type is made. Is going.

  Further, in this game R293, in the finalization notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, since the finalization notification flag is on, the condition device has an internal winning result (No. 3 or No. 3 in this example) related to the AT1 type. No. 4). In this example, the condition device is No. 3 and the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation prompting the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 1 or Seven 2) is executed, and the preparation for shifting the production state from the fixed notification state to the AT1 state is made. Is going.

  The following game R292 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 292, the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the final notification state is 20, and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R292, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the BET operation is performed), the effect state is the AT1 state using the effect image display device 157. Is performed, and an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) indicating a stop operation is executed, and the remaining number of games in the AT1 state (the effect state counter before subtraction) is executed. Is displayed, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the character “20G”) is executed.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and the promotion counter / In case of not reaching the ceiling in a two-betting game>
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the production in the case where the two betting game is performed in the high navigation state, the ceiling state is not reached, and the production state is maintained in the normal state.

  In this example, since the two-gaming game is continued in the game after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the ceiling counter is not subtracted. Therefore, in the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19, the ceiling counter after the subtraction is not determined to be a certain value (0 in this example), and the effect state shifts to the AT1 state. Not even. Also, in the two-bet game, the effect state counter in the normal state is not updated, so that in the normal state processing B described with reference to FIG. 28, it is not determined that the effect state counter has become 0. However, the production state does not become the final announcement state.

  That is, in this example, a certain second counter (in this example, a ceiling counter) different from the first counter (in this example, the high navigation state counter) relating to the advantageous state (in this example, the high navigation state). Is configured to be able to update a certain count value of the second counter (ceiling counter) every time a game is played in the advantageous state (high navigation state), and the certain count value is set to the second certain value. When the value becomes 0 (in this example), it is configured to shift to a specific advantageous state (AT1 state in this example) which is advantageous to the player. In the case where one game (in this example, a game of three bets) is performed, both of a specific count value (a value of a high navigation state counter) and a certain count value (a value of a ceiling counter) are counted. The value is configured to be updatable, In the case where the second game (in this example, the double betting game) is performed in the navigation state), the specific count value (the value of the high navigation state counter) and a certain count value (the value of the ceiling counter) are determined. Only the specific count value (the value of the high navigation state counter) is configured to be updatable.

  For this reason, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing the first game correctly and the player who is playing the second game. Also, by preferentially treating a player who has correctly played the first game, it can be expected that a player who has not correctly played the game will be corrected.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and the promotion counter / When reaching the ceiling with a 3-betting game and a 2-betting game>
FIG. 70 shows an example of the flow of the production in the case where the three-player game and the two-player bet game are performed in the high navigation state and the ceiling is reached, and the production state shifts in the order of the normal state, the confirmation notification state, and the AT1 state. FIG.

  In this example, since two betting games are performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the two-betting game (in this example, the game from the next game after game R999 to the game In the period of 100 games up to R899), the ceiling counter is not decremented. For this reason, in the game after the game R898, the three-betting game is performed and the ceiling counter is decremented. However, the effect example described with reference to FIG. The number of games required to reach the ceiling is 100 games behind, and the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 200, and the game reaches the ceiling. Note that the flow of the effect in the case of transition from the normal state to the confirmed notification state to the AT1 state is the same as in the other embodiments, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Updating of the ceiling counter and the promotion counter / When shifting to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of an effect in a case where a three-player game and a two-player bet game are performed in the high navigation state, and the game shifts to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling.

  In this example, since two betting games are performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the two-betting game (in this example, the game from the next game after game R999 to the game In the period up to the game before R20), the ceiling counter is not decremented. For this reason, in the subsequent game after the game R19, a three-bet game is performed. However, compared to the effect example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches 300 on the ceiling), The number of games before reaching the ceiling is delayed, and the game has shifted to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling (the ceiling counter does not become 0). Note that the flow of the effect in the case of transition from the normal state to the LMT state is the same as in the other embodiments, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and the promotion counter / When shifting to the low navigation state without reaching the ceiling>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when a three-player game and a two-player bet game are performed in the high navigation state, and the game shifts to the low navigation state without reaching the ceiling.

  In this example, since two betting games are performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the two-betting game (in this example, the game from the next game after game R999 to the game In the period up to R0), the ceiling counter is not decremented. For this reason, the number of games required to reach the ceiling is delayed as compared to the effect example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches 300 at the ceiling), and the game does not reach the ceiling. (The ceiling counter does not become 0), the high navigation state ends with the normal state, and the state shifts to the low navigation state.

  The flow of the effect in the case of transition from the normal state of the high navigation state to the normal state of the low navigation state is the same as that of the other embodiments, and a description thereof will be omitted, but using FIG. 60 (b). As described above, in this example, in the high navigation state, the state transitions to the low navigation state without transitioning to a state other than the normal state (such as the AT1 state or the AT2 state). However, the ED effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed. ing.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / If the promotion counter is not updated>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect in the case where the three-player game and the two-player bet game are performed in the finalized notification state of the high navigation state and the promotion counter is not updated.

  In this example, since the two-bet game is performed in a plurality of games in the final notification state in which the effect state has shifted from the normal state, the period of the two-bet game (in the present example, the next game R294 In the period from the game to the game R270), the promotion counter is not decremented. For this reason, the number of games until the transition from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state is delayed compared to the effect example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches the ceiling at 300), and AT1 After the display regarding the type promotion lottery (promotion lottery display) is performed over a plurality of game periods (the period from game R294 to game R270 in this example), the state is shifted to the AT1 state. Note that the flow of the effect in the case of shifting from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state is the same as in the other embodiments, and a description thereof will be omitted.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When not performing operation navigation>
FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating an example of the flow of the effect when the operation navigation is not performed in the high-navigation finalization notification state.

  This example is different from the effect example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high-navigation state is 300 and reaches the ceiling) in the first game in the finalized notification state. The only difference is that it is 3. In the confirmation notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, when the confirmation notification flag is on, the condition device is the internal winning result (No. 3 or No. 4 in this example) related to the AT1 type. Or not. However, in the game R295, since the confirmation notification flag is off, the determination itself is not performed. Therefore, the operation navigation performed when the condition device is the internal winning result of the AT1 type (in the present example, Seven 1 In addition, there is no need to execute a reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 2), nor to prepare to shift the effect state from the finalized state to the AT1 state.

<Specific example of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When the AT1 type is promoted>
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the AT1 type is promoted in the high-navigation state finalized notification state.

  The game R270 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 270, and the promotion counter has reached a certain value (10 in this example) in the confirmed notification state, and a game in which a three-player bet game is performed. is there. In this game R270, since the promotion counter has reached a certain value (10 in this example), the AT1 type is changed from low to high (the AT1 type is promoted), and the judge mode is accurately changed from normal. are doing.

  In the game R270, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the display related to the promotion lottery of the AT1 type is performed using the effect image display device 157. After performing (promotion lottery display), another condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), and the promotion of the AT1 type is performed using the effect image display device 157. Is displayed (promotion display) to indicate that is confirmed.

  In the game R270, since the confirmation notification flag is on, if the condition device is the internal winning result related to the AT1 type, in addition to the promotion display, the operation navigation (in this example, Seven 1 or Seven 2) (Naviation for prompting a reverse push operation aiming at the symbol (1)) and preparing to shift the effect state from the finalized state to the AT1 state.

  The game R268 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 268 and a three-bet game is performed. In the game R268, the bonus confirmation display (display including the character “bonus confirmation!” In this example) is continued as a normal effect. Also, in this game R268, in the finalization notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, since the finalization notification flag is on, the condition device has the internal winning result (No. 3 or No. 3 in this example) related to the AT1 type. No. 4). In this example, the condition device is No. Since it is 4, an operation navigation (in this example, a navigation prompting a reverse push operation aiming at the blue 7 symbol) is executed.

<Specific examples of changes in rights due to reaching the ceiling>
Next, a specific example of a change in right due to reaching the ceiling will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. FIGS. 76 to 77 are timing charts each showing a flow of the effect, and show the effect form of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the vehicle does not reach the ceiling in the high-navigation state finalized notification state.

  The game R329 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 329, and the game is in the finalized notification state immediately after shifting from the normal state, and in which a three-player betting game is performed. In this game R329, as a normal effect, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the character “bonus confirmation!”) For notifying the transition to the AT1 state is executed. Further, in this game R329, since the internal winning result is a loss, the production state is maintained in the finalized state.

  The following game R328 is the second game in the confirmed notification state in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328, and is a game in which a three-bet game is performed. In this game R328, the bonus confirmation display (display including the character “bonus confirmation!” In this example) is continued as a normal effect. In this game R328, the condition device is No. 3 and the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation prompting the reverse push operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 1 or Seven 2) is executed, and the preparation for shifting the production state from the fixed notification state to the AT1 state is made. Is going.

  The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327, the number of remaining games in the AT1 state shifted from the finalized notification state is 20, and a three-player betting game is performed. In the game R327, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the BET operation is performed), the effect state is the AT1 state using the effect image display device 157. Is performed, and an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) indicating a stop operation is executed, and the remaining number of games in the AT1 state (the effect state counter before subtraction) is executed. Is displayed, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the character “20G”) is executed.

  In this example, the AT1 type was not changed from low to high (not promoted) because the vehicle did not reach the ceiling in the high-navigation state finalized notification state.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the effect when the vehicle reaches the ceiling in the confirmed notification state of the high navigation state.

  The game R300 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 300, and the game is in the confirmed notification state. In this game R300, since the ceiling counter after the subtraction has reached a certain value (0 in this example), it is determined that the ceiling has been reached, and the AT1 type is changed from low to high (by being promoted). There). Further, in the game R300, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the character “bonus confirmation!”) For notifying the transition to the AT1 state is executed as a normal effect. Further, in this game R300, the condition device is No. Since the number is 4, the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation which prompts the reverse pressing operation aiming at the symbol of Seven 1) is executed.

  In this example, if the first right (pseudo bonus with low profit) is acquired when the vehicle reaches the ceiling in the high-navigation finalized notification state, the second right (pseudo bonus with high profit) is changed. Since it is configured to be in the acquired state, even if the game from the determination of the grant of the privilege to the transition to a certain advantageous game state (for example, the AT1 state) in the advantageous state becomes long, The game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

<Other production examples>
Next, another effect example will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a diagram for describing another effect example.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect in a case where a three-stake betting game is performed in the LMT state, and FIG. 78 (b) is a diagram in a case where a two-slot bet game is performed in the LMT state It is the figure which showed an example of ED effect of (a).

  According to the slot machine of the modification of the first embodiment, when the normal three-stake betting game continues to be executed in the LMT state, as shown in FIG. 78A, the period of the 20 games in the LMT state During the game, an ED effect is performed, and an end screen is executed in the final game. On the other hand, when the two-stake betting game is continuously executed in the LMT state, the display of the end screen is continued as shown in FIG. 78 (b).

  FIG. 78 (c) is a diagram showing a modification of the specific display shown in FIG. 67 (D). In the effect example shown in FIG. 67 (D), the specific display is displayed using all the display areas of the effect image display device 157. However, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), at least the first display area (this example) Has a plurality of display areas including an upper half display area and a second display area (in this example, a lower half display area), and the first display area switches the display in a certain period. The second display area may be a display area in which display switching is not performed during the certain period, and a specific display may be displayed in the first display area. With such a configuration, a specific display can be displayed in the first display area while a certain display can be continuously displayed in the second display area, and a staging effect can be enhanced. There is.

  As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the present invention 1-1”) operates the operating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 1). (The stop buttons 137 to 139), and shifts to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). A game console provided with control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) for causing the display to display a plurality of types of displays (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1). The operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation of the reels such as the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 45 and the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52 or the like) Information that can identify the position and stop sequence ) Can be notified, and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 52). High navigation state counter), and is configured to be able to update the count value of the specific counter each time a game is played in the advantageous state, and to switch from the advantageous state to the above-mentioned state when a certain end condition is satisfied. A transition is made to a normal state, and the certain end condition is that the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, the number of games since the transition to the advantageous state is the upper limit). (The number of times the game has reached the number of times), the first game (for example, a three-bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number, and the number of bets on the game medium in the second number. A second game ( For example, two betting games) can be executed, the second number is different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first number is more than the second game. Is a more advantageous game for the player, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as a “first display”. 79 is a first display d1), and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing an updated value of the certain value (hereinafter, referred to as a “second display”). For example, when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the count value is updated. In the first game, the second display can be displayed. If the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the profit state, the count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game It is a gaming table characterized by being configured as described above. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-1.

  According to the gaming table according to Invention 1-1 of the present application, it is possible to notify that a player is playing a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  The gaming table according to the invention 1-1 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the embodiment. Therefore, for example, it is configured to be able to shift to a first advantageous game state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 and the like) in the advantageous state, and the first advantageous game state can notify the operation information. It is a certain game state, and the certain value is a value indicating a value related to the number of games (for example, the number of remaining games) in the first advantageous game state, and is one of the plurality of types of display. Is a display including an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state is 0 (hereinafter, referred to as a “third display”), and in the first advantageous game state, When the second game is performed, the first advantageous game state may end without displaying the third display.

  With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, the player is notified of the fact that the player has performed a disadvantageous game (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. It is possible to do. In addition, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state is given to the player, and the third display is displayed. By being displayed suddenly, it becomes possible to carefully select the bet number of the game medium in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  One of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image related to an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth display”). The fourth display is a display including an image relating to an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state (for example, a display including a character such as “+20”, or a display from a number of remaining games “LAST5” to “LAST25”). Display), the fourth display may be displayed when the first game is performed in the first advantageous game state, and the fourth display may be displayed in the first advantageous game state. When the second game is played, the fourth display may not be displayed.

  With such a configuration, the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous game state is eliminated because the fourth display is not displayed when the second game is performed in the first advantageous game state. Is given to the player, it is possible to carefully select the bet number of the game medium in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  Further, even in the case where the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the first advantageous game state, the first display is not displayed and the first game is performed. The advantageous game state may end.

  With such a configuration, the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, thereby giving the player an impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state. Thus, it is possible to carefully select the bet number of the game medium in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, an LMT state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is different from the first advantageous gaming state. In another gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, the third game is performed when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. The first advantageous game state may end without the display of, and the second advantageous game state may start.

  With such a configuration, the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, thereby giving the player an impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state. In this way, while carefully selecting the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent games, the second advantageous game state may be started when returning from the second game to the first game. In this way, it is possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned to the first game, and it is possible to maintain the willingness to play the game.

  In addition, a lottery process (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the role and determining the lottery result is provided, In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a game with three cards) after performing the second game (for example, a game with two cards). In some cases, the game can be performed more carefully. Further, even if the game from the determination of the privilege provision to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and may be a state in which the winning probability of the replaying game is higher than the normal state.

Further, the above-mentioned “when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state” is “the first display in a certain state in the advantageous state”. Is displayed after the execution of the first game is started '', and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state. The case where "the game has been performed" may be the case where "the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in a certain state in the advantageous state". In addition, when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the count value is updated and the second game is executed in the first game. The second display is configured to be able to be displayed '' means that, when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the count value is Is updated so that the second display is displayed in the first game. "
Further, the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present example has an operation means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) and a normal state (for example, shown in FIG. Control means for shifting to any one of a plurality of states including a low navigation state and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3). And a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means. The advantageous state is a notification of the operation information (hereinafter, referred to as “operation navigation”. For example, an operation navigation using the number-of-payouts indicator 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, an effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, and the like. Operation navigation using The operation navigation is a navigation that is more advantageous than the normal state, and the operation navigation is a navigation about a pressing role, and is a first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter illustrated in FIGS. 18 and 52). And the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, referred to as “first count value”) can be updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state. And when one of a plurality of end conditions including a second end condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the first end condition is This is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after shifting to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number). In the advantageous state It is configured to be able to shift to any of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one of the plurality of advantageous game states is a first advantageous game state (for example, AT2 shown in FIG. 53). The first advantageous game state is an advantageous game state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and includes a second counter (for example, the effect state counter shown in FIG. 53) related to the first advantageous game state. The count value of the second counter (hereinafter, referred to as “second count value”) can be updated each time one game is played in the first advantageous game state, Even in the case where a game that has not been won in the pushing order is performed in the advantageous gaming state, the second count value is configured to be updateable, and the bet number of the game medium is the first number. A certain first game (for example, three betting Game) and a second game (for example, a game of two bets) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number, and the second number is the first number. In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of display is (Hereinafter referred to as “first display”). For example, it is a first display d1) shown in FIG. 79, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image representing an updated value of the certain value (hereinafter, “second display”). For example, one of the plurality of types of display is a specific display different from any of the first display and the second display. (Hereinafter, referred to as “third display”; for example, a specific display shown in FIG. 65 (b)), wherein the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the first advantageous gaming state. In the case where the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated, and In the first game, the second display is configured to be displayed When the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the first count value and the second count value Only the first count value is updated, and the second display is displayed without displaying the second display in the second game, and the number of game media used in the advantageous state is displayed. And a third counter for counting the total number of game media obtained by the player based on the number of game media paid out, and the count value of the third counter every time one game is played in the advantageous state. (Hereinafter, referred to as a “third count value”, for example, a difference number counter shown in FIG. 18), and the second end condition is that the third count value is the second identification value. Value (eg, 1840) Is a condition that can be satisfied when the game reaches the game, regardless of whether the first game or the second game is executed in the advantageous state, based on the result of the game, The third count value is configured to be renewable, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a start display of a certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth display”. For example, a fourth display shown in FIG. 86) Second display d2 (display of judgment effect start)), and when the execution of the first game is started in a certain state in the first advantageous game state, the second game is executed in the first game. Fourth display is configured to be displayed, and when the execution of the second game is started in the certain state, the fourth display is not displayed in the second game. A gaming table characterized by is there.
According to the gaming table according to the present example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous for the player than the first game, is started, the execution of the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value of the value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is executed. What has been done can be notified in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (the counter relating to the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the player who correctly plays the first game and the second game plays the second game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing. Also, by preferentially treating a player who has correctly played the first game, it can be expected that a player who has not correctly played the game will be corrected.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the present invention 1-2”) includes operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 shown in FIG. 139), a control state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, a game console provided with a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3 and operation information of the operation means (for example, an operation navigation using a payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 52, etc., which can identify the stop position and the stop order of each reel, such as an operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc., and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. More advantageous than the normal state State, and includes a specific counter relating to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 52), and updates the count value of the specific counter every time a game is played in the advantageous state. Is configured to be able to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, wherein the certain end condition is such that the count value is equal to a first specific value. This is a condition that is satisfied when a value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number. A first game (for example, a three-betting game) and a second game (for example, a two-betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number are configured to be executable; Is a number different from the first number In the advantageous state, the first game is a game more advantageous to the player than the second game, and a specific effect (for example, the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 80) is provided in the advantageous state. It is configured to be able to start execution, and when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of execution of the game, if the game is the first game, the count value is updated and the first value is updated. In the game, the execution of the specific effect is configured to be startable, and when the certain requirement is satisfied at the time of starting the execution of the game, if the game is the second game, the count value Is updated so that execution of the specific effect is not started in the second game. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-2.

  According to the gaming table according to the invention 1-2 of the present application, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  The gaming table according to the present invention 1-2 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the certain requirement is satisfied, the game may be shifted to the second advantageous game state, and the execution of the specific effect may be started on condition of the shift.

  Further, the certain requirement is that the first count value is a second specific value, and the first specific value and the second specific value are different values. Good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player.

  Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous game state (for example, an LMT state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and the second advantageous game state is a certain state capable of notifying the operation information. Is a gaming state, wherein the second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of games after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a certain number of times, to which a transition can be made, and wherein the second advantageous gaming state is The game may be a game state in which the user can stay until the end of the advantageous state, and the specific effect may be an effect executable in the second advantageous state.

  With such a configuration, by giving the player an impression of losing the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in a subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  Further, when the state shifts to the second advantageous game state without performing the second game after shifting to the advantageous state (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”), the second advantage is provided. When the maximum number of executions of the first game in the gaming state is the first number, and the state shifts to the second advantageous game state after the second game is performed after shifting to the advantageous state. (Hereinafter, referred to as “second case”), the maximum number of executions of the first game in the second advantageous game state may be a second number, and the maximum number of executions may be more than the first number. The second number is a smaller number, and includes a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is , A display corresponding to the first number of times (hereinafter, referred to as a “first display”). In one case, the first display is configured to be displayed at the time of transition to the second advantageous gaming state, and in the second case, the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is performed. In this case, the first display may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, by giving the player an impression of losing the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in a subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, it is configured to be able to shift to a first advantageous game state in the advantageous state, and the first advantageous game state is different from the second advantageous game state and can notify the operation information. One of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state is 0 (hereinafter, “second display”). In the case where the second game is performed in the first advantageous game state, the first advantageous game state ends without displaying the second display. There may be.

  Further, when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state may end without performing the specific effect.

  With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without performing a specific effect, and by giving the player an impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state, It becomes possible to make the selection of the number of bets on the game medium carefully. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  Further, the specific effect may be an effect in which advantageous information for the player may be notified.

  With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without the player being notified of advantageous information, and by giving the player an impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state, It is possible to carefully select the number of bets of the game medium in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  In the advantageous state, execution of a certain freeze effect (for example, a freeze effect fz1 shown in FIG. 81) can be started, and the specific effect is an effect related to the certain freeze effect. Is also good.

  In addition, a display unit (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display unit includes a first display (for example, a first display d1 shown in FIG. 79) and a second display (for example, 79 is a means capable of displaying a first display d2) shown in FIG. 79, wherein the first display includes an image showing the number of remaining games in the advantageous state (for example, the numeral 30 shown in FIG. 79). The second display is a display including an image indicating a certain number of remaining games (for example, the numeral 29 shown in FIG. 79), and the second display is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state. When the first game is played, the second display may be displayed without displaying the first display.

  With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, the player is notified of the fact that the player has performed a disadvantageous game (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. It is possible to do. In addition, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state is given to the player, and the third display is displayed. By being displayed suddenly, it becomes possible to carefully select the bet number of the game medium in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, a lottery process (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the role and determining the lottery result is provided, In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a game with three cards) after performing the second game (for example, a game with two cards). In some cases, the game can be performed more carefully. Further, even if the game from the determination of the privilege provision to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and may be a state in which the winning probability of the replaying game is higher than the normal state.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-3”) includes operating means (for example, the stop button 137 through the stop button 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), a control state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, a game console provided with a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3 and operation information of the operation means (for example, an operation navigation using a payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 52, etc., which can identify the stop position and the stop order of each reel, such as an operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc., and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. Advantageous over the normal state State, and includes a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 52), and updates the count value of the specific counter every time a game is played in the advantageous state. Is configured to be able to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, wherein the certain end condition is such that the count value is equal to a first specific value. This is a condition that is satisfied when a value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and the number of bets on the game medium is the first number. A first game (for example, a three-betting game) and a second game (for example, a two-betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number are configured to be executable; Is a number different from the first number Yes, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and in the advantageous state, there is a certain freeze effect (for example, a freeze effect fz1 shown in FIG. 81). Is configured to be able to start, and when a certain condition is satisfied at the time of starting the execution of the game, if the game is the first game, the count value is updated and the first value is updated. In the game, the execution of the certain freeze effect is configured to be able to start, and when the certain requirement is satisfied at the time of starting the execution of the game, when the game is the second game, A game console characterized in that the count value is updated and the execution of the certain freeze effect is not started in the second game. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-3.

  According to the gaming table according to the invention 1-3 of the present application, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  The gaming table according to the present invention 1-3 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the certain requirement is satisfied, the game may be shifted to the second advantageous game state, and the execution of the specific effect may be started on condition of the shift.

  Further, the certain requirement is that the first count value is a second specific value, and the first specific value and the second specific value are different values. Good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player.

  Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as a “second advantageous gaming state”; for example, an LMT state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is provided. The state is a certain gaming state in which the operation information can be reported, and the second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the number of games after shifting to the advantageous state reaches a certain number of times. The second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the user can stay until the end of the advantageous state, and the certain freeze effect is started to be executed in connection with the transition to the second advantageous gaming state. Production.

  With such a configuration, by giving the player an impression of losing the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in a subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  Further, when the state shifts to the second advantageous game state without performing the second game after shifting to the advantageous state (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”), the second advantage is provided. When the maximum number of executions of the first game in the gaming state is the first number, and the state shifts to the second advantageous game state after the second game is performed after shifting to the advantageous state. (Hereinafter, referred to as “second case”), the maximum number of executions of the first game in the second advantageous game state may be a second number, and the maximum number of executions may be more than the first number. The second number is a smaller number, and includes a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is , A display corresponding to the first number of times (hereinafter, referred to as a “first display”). In one case, the first display is configured to be displayed at the time of transition to the second advantageous gaming state, and in the second case, the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is performed. In this case, the first display may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, by giving the player an impression of losing the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in a subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, it is configured to be able to shift to a first advantageous game state in the advantageous state, and the first advantageous game state is different from the second advantageous game state and can notify the operation information. One of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state is 0 (hereinafter, “second display”). In the case where the second game is performed in the first advantageous game state, the first advantageous game state ends without displaying the second display. There may be.

  Further, when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state may end without performing the certain freeze effect.

  With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without performing a certain freeze effect, and by giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state, It is possible to make the selection of the number of bets of the game media in the above carefully. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  In the advantageous state, execution of a specific effect (for example, ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 80) can be started, and the certain freeze effect may be an effect related to the specific effect. Good.

  Further, the specific effect may be an effect in which advantageous information for the player may be notified.

  With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without the player being notified of advantageous information, and by giving the player an impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state, It is possible to carefully select the number of bets of the game medium in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, a display unit (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display unit includes a first display (for example, a first display d1 shown in FIG. 79) and a second display (for example, 79 is a means capable of displaying a first display d2) shown in FIG. 79, wherein the first display includes an image showing the number of remaining games in the advantageous state (for example, the numeral 30 shown in FIG. 79). The second display is a display including an image indicating a certain number of remaining games (for example, the numeral 29 shown in FIG. 79), and the second display is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state. When the first game is played, the second display may be displayed without displaying the first display.

  With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, the player is notified of the fact that the player has performed a disadvantageous game (second game) in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. It is possible to do. In addition, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state is given to the player, and the third display is displayed. By being displayed suddenly, it becomes possible to carefully select the bet number of the game medium in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, a lottery process (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the role and determining the lottery result is provided, In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a game with three cards) after performing the second game (for example, a game with two cards). In some cases, the game can be performed more carefully. Further, even if the game from the determination of the privilege provision to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and may be a state in which the winning probability of the replaying game is higher than the normal state.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the present invention 1-4”) includes operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), a control state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, a game console provided with a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3 and operation information of the operation means (for example, an operation navigation using a payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 52, etc., which can identify the stop position and the stop order of each reel, such as an operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc., and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. More advantageous than the normal state State, and includes a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 52), and updates the count value of the specific counter every time a game is played in the advantageous state. It is configured to be able to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is that the count value is a specific value (for example, , 0) (for example, when the number of games since the transition to the advantageous state has reached the upper limit), and the first condition in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number A game (for example, a three-betting game) and a second game (for example, a two-betting game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number are configured to be executable, and the second number is Is a number different from the first number In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game, and the first advantageous state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 and the like) in the advantageous state. The game is configured to be able to execute a certain effect (for example, an end effect fn1 shown in FIG. 82) relating to the end of the first advantageous gaming state, and to execute the first effect in the advantageous state. When only a game is performed, the game is configured to shift to the first advantageous game state and perform the certain effect in some cases, and only the second game is performed in the advantageous state. When the game is performed, the certain effect is configured to be executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-4.

  According to the gaming table according to the present invention 1-4, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player by notifying that the advantageous state has ended for the game in which the second game is being played. In addition, by giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in a subsequent game.

  The gaming table according to the present invention 1-4 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means displays the difference number which is the difference between the game medium inserted by the player and the game medium obtained by the player. Means for displaying the number-of-differences display, and when the difference number is less than 0, a display indicating 0 is displayed as the number-of-differences display. When only the second game is performed, the expected value of the difference number is configured to be less than 0, and the certain game is executed when only the second game is performed in the advantageous state. Even if it is an effect, the difference number display may be configured to be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game. In addition, by giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in an advantageous game state, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in a subsequent game.

  Further, even in the case where the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the certain effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state. May be present.

  With such a configuration, a certain effect may be executed without shifting to the first advantageous gaming state, and by giving the player an impression of losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state. Thus, it is possible to carefully select the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent game. In addition, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game.

  Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, an LMT state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is different from the first advantageous gaming state. In another certain advantageous game state, when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the second game is performed without shifting to the first advantageous game state. It may be configured such that there is a case where the certain effect is executed by shifting to the second advantageous game state.

  With such a configuration, the transition to the second advantageous game state without the transition to the first advantageous game state and the end effect may be performed, so that the number of games is lost in the advantageous game state. By giving the player the impression that the bet number of the game media in the subsequent game is carefully selected, the second advantageous game state is changed when the second game is returned to the first game. By starting the game in some cases, it is possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned to the first game, and it is possible to maintain the desire to play the game.

  Further, the “certain effect related to the end of the first advantageous game state” may be “a certain effect related to the end of the advantageous state”.

  In addition, a lottery process (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the role and determining the lottery result is provided, In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a game with three cards) after performing the second game (for example, a game with two cards). In some cases, the game can be performed more carefully. Further, even if the game from the determination of the privilege provision to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and may be a state in which the winning probability of the replaying game is higher than the normal state.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the present invention 1-5”) includes operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), a control state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) and a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104 shown in FIG. 10) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process relating to the internal winning of a winning combination and determining a lottery result. Operation table (eg, an operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 45, an operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) , Stop of each reel The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, , A high-navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18, FIG. 52, etc., so that the count value of the specific counter can be updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state, and a certain termination condition is satisfied. In this case, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is that when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, This is a condition that is satisfied when the number of games after the transition reaches the upper limit number), and the combination is a special game (for example, a special game shown in FIG. 6A or FIG. 43A) when a prize is won. Status And a special role that can be shifted to a certain advantageous game state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 or the like) in the advantageous state, and a certain effect related to the end of the certain advantageous game state. (For example, an end effect fn1 shown in FIG. 83), and is configured to be able to start the execution of the end effect by shifting to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state. When playing a game in a state where the special combination is internally won, the execution of the certain effect can be started without shifting to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state. It is a gaming table characterized by having. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-5.

  According to the gaming table according to the invention 1-5 of the present application, even if the advantageous state ends without the symbols related to the special role being arranged, by making the player feel like having shifted to a certain advantageous gaming state, It is possible to reduce unfortunate feelings and rushing feelings. In addition, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  The gaming table according to the present invention 1-5 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means displays the difference number which is the difference between the game medium inserted by the player and the game medium obtained by the player. Means for displaying the number-of-differences display, and when the difference number is less than 0, a display indicating 0 is displayed as the number-of-differences display. Even if the certain effect is executed without shifting to an advantageous gaming state, the display may be such that the difference number display is displayed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game. In addition, by making it possible to emphasize the small number of acquired pieces, by giving a loss impression to the player, the number of bets on the game medium in the subsequent game can be carefully selected. In addition, a player who is playing a game correctly has a relatively large display of the acquired number, so that such a superior feeling of the player can be satisfied.

In addition, in the certain effect that is executed without shifting to the certain advantageous gaming state in the advantageous state, a notification regarding the special combination is not performed even when the special combination is internally won. May be configured.
With such a configuration, it may be possible to satisfy the sense of superiority of advanced users.

  Further, the above-mentioned “certain effect related to the end of the certain advantageous game state” may be “a certain effect related to the end of the advantageous state”.

  Further, the first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number and the second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number are configured to be executable, and the second number Is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game, and the combination is Including a re-gaming role that can play a game regardless of the insertion, in a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the second game than the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the first game The probability may be higher in the winning probability.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a game with three cards) after performing the second game (for example, a game with two cards). In some cases, the game can be performed more carefully. Further, even if the game from the determination of the privilege provision to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and may be a state in which the winning probability of the replaying game is higher than the normal state.

  Further, when the second game is performed in the advantageous state and the special combination is internally won, the certain effect of the certain effect is not transferred to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state. The execution may be configured to start.

  In addition, in the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-6”), the gaming machine bet number is the first number. One game (for example, a three-bet game) and a second game (for example, a two-bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number are configured to be executable, and the second game is performed. The number is a number different from the first number, and in a certain state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, A certain effect (for example, the linked effect shown in FIG. 84) is configured to be executable, and the certain effect is an effect including an effect of a plurality of scenes, and is one of the effects of the plurality of scenes. The production of the scene is the production of the first scene (for example, the first scene shown in FIG. 84). The effect of one scene among the effects of the plurality of scenes is an effect of a second scene (for example, a second scene shown in FIG. 84), and the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed After the execution of the first game, the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the first game, and the effect of the first scene is executed. When the execution of the second game is started after the played game, the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game. It is a game table. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-6.

  According to the gaming table according to Invention 1-6 of the present application, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player.

  The gaming table according to the present invention 1-6 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, in the first game, Execution of the performance of the second scene may be started.

  With such a configuration, it is possible for a player who has returned from the second game to the first game to enjoy the flow of the correct effect.

  Further, when the second game is performed after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, the second game is performed in the first game. The execution of another certain effect may be started without starting the execution of the effect of the scene.

  With such a configuration, another certain effect is suddenly executed, so that the effect is strongly impressed to the player, and the first game is performed again for the player who has returned to the first game. You can reconfirm what you were doing.

  Further, when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game. The execution of at least a part of the effects of the first scene may be started.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. Further, by repeating the effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and make the player aware that the player is playing the second game. In addition, by attracting the player's attention as if it is a rare effect in which the same effect is repeated, the player may be able to focus on the number of bets on the game medium.

  In addition, the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. It is configured to be able to notify a stop position and a stop order), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (for the advantageous state) For example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18, FIG. 52, or the like) is provided, and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the specific counter can be updated. The system is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when the condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is that the count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (for example, For example, if the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number of times), the above condition is satisfied. When the execution is started, the execution of the effect of the second scene in the first game is configured to be able to be started, and "the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed After the execution of the first game is started, the first count value is updated, and the execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the first game, In the case where the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the production of the second scene in the second game Is configured not to be started. " When the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the second scene is performed, the execution of the effect of the second scene is started in the second game by updating the count value. Is configured not to be performed. "

  With such a configuration, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. It becomes possible.

  In addition, a lottery process (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the role and determining the lottery result is provided, In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a game with three cards) after performing the second game (for example, a game with two cards). In some cases, the game can be performed more carefully. Further, even if the game from the determination of the privilege provision to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and may be a state in which the winning probability of the replaying game is higher than the normal state.

  In addition, a first game (for example, a three-game bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number, and a second game (for example, two-game bet) in which the bet number of the game medium is a second number Game), the second number is different from the first number, and in a certain state, the first game has a higher number than the second game. This is an advantageous game for the player, and is configured to be able to execute a certain effect (for example, the linked effect shown in FIG. 63 or the linked effect shown in FIG. 64 (D)) over a plurality of games. Is an effect including an effect of a plurality of scenes, and an effect of one of the effects of the plurality of scenes is a first scene (for example, a scene of “enemy attack” shown in FIG. 63, 64 (D), which is the scene of the “enemy attack” shown in FIG. 64 (D). When the execution of the first game is started after a technique, the effect of the first scene is configured to be continuously executable in the first game, and the effect of the first scene is performed. When the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first game is performed, the effect of the first scene is not continuously executed in the second game. It may be a gaming table with features.

  According to such a gaming table, it is possible to notify that the player has played a game (second game) disadvantageous to the player in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player.

  Further, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, the second game is performed in the first game. The execution of the effect of one scene may be started.

  Further, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, the second game is performed in the first game. It may be configured such that the execution of an effect of one scene is not started but the execution of another certain effect can be started.

  Further, when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game. The execution of at least a part of the effects of the first scene may be started.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “the present invention 1-7”) includes operation means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), a control state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, a game console including a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3, wherein a first game (for example, a three-bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number, and a game medium Is configured to be able to execute a second game in which the number of bets is a second number (for example, a two-betting game), wherein the second number is different from the first number, In the advantageous state, the first game is given to the player more than the second game. The operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) , Information that can identify the stop position and the stop order of each reel), the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and the advantageous state A specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 52), and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the specific counter (hereinafter, “specific count value”) ) Is configured to be able to be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the state is shifted from the advantageous state to the normal state. This condition is satisfied when the event value has reached a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games since the transition to the advantageous state has reached the upper limit), and a certain counter related to the advantageous state. (For example, ceiling counters shown in FIGS. 85, 19, 68, etc.), and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the certain counter (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain count value”). Can be updated, and when the certain count value becomes a certain value (for example, 0), a specific advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a specific advantageous state shown in FIG. 85, FIG. 68, etc.), and when the first game is performed in the advantageous state, both of the specific count value and the certain count value are performed. Update count value When the second game is played in the advantageous state, only the specific count value of the specific count value and the certain count value can be updated. A gaming table characterized by the following. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-7.

  According to the gaming table of the present invention 1-7, the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, so that the fairness of the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game is fair. Can be secured. Also, by preferentially treating a player who has correctly played the first game, it can be expected that a player who has not correctly played the game will be corrected.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention 1-7 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the configuration is such that the specific advantageous state may be shifted in the advantageous state. Is also good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the privilege returned from the second game to the first game, thereby maintaining the player's willingness to play the game.

  In addition, when the number of games of the second game in the advantageous state exceeds a certain number, there is no case where the specific advantageous state is shifted even if the first game is performed in the advantageous state. It may be configured as follows.

  With such a configuration, the second game is allowed for a player who has made a mistake in counting the number of games, and the player who has performed the second game with malicious intent (for example, searching for a strategy) (I.e., a player who plays an irregular game such as an irregular game) by favorably favoring the player playing the first game and correcting the player playing the second game. Can be expected.

  Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a first advantageous game state, the first advantageous game state is a certain advantageous game state capable of notifying the operation information, and the specific advantageous state is provided. May be a state relating to the transition to the first advantageous gaming state.

  Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous game state (for example, an LMT state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and the second advantageous game state can notify the operation information. When the specific count value becomes a third value (for example, 20), it is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous game state, and the specific value and the specific value The third value is another value, and even if the number of games of the second game in the advantageous state exceeds the certain number, the first game was performed in the advantageous state In such a case, it may be configured such that the state may shift to the second advantageous game state before the advantageous state ends.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the privilege returned from the second game to the first game, thereby maintaining the player's willingness to play the game.

  In addition, a lottery process (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the role and determining the lottery result is provided, In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a game with three cards) after performing the second game (for example, a game with two cards). In some cases, the game can be performed more carefully. Further, even if the game from the determination of the privilege provision to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and may be a state in which the winning probability of the replaying game is higher than the normal state.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-8”) includes operation means (for example, the stop button 137 through the stop button 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), a control state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, a game console including a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) and display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein the operation means (For example, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 45, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) Information that can identify The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to notification of the operation information, and is a specific counter relating to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter illustrated in FIG. 18 or FIG. 52). Each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the specific counter is configured to be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the state shifts from the advantageous state to the normal state. The certain end condition is that the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games since the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number) ), The first game (for example, a three-sheet bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number, and the second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number. (For example, two bets Game), the second number is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more effective than the second game. The game is advantageous to the player, and is configured to be able to shift to any one of the plurality of advantageous game states in the advantageous state, and is one of the plurality of advantageous game states. The state is a first advantageous game state (for example, a first advantageous game state shown in FIG. 86 or an AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and one of the plurality of advantageous game states is an advantageous game state. , A second advantageous game state (for example, a first advantageous game state shown in FIG. 86 or a judge state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and the first advantageous game state is more than the second advantageous game state. Is in an advantageous state for the player, and the first advantageous After the end of the gaming state, it is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and one of the plurality of types of display is displayed at the end of the first advantageous gaming state. Display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”). For example, it is a first display d1) shown in FIG. 86, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a certain display corresponding to the second advantageous game state (hereinafter, “second display”). For example, a second display d2) shown in Fig. 86, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a specific display different from any of the first display and the second display. (Hereinafter, referred to as a “third display”; for example, a third display d1 shown in FIG. 86), and when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed. When the count value is updated and the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed , The count value is updated and the third display is displayed in the game. Viewable a configuration,

A gaming table characterized by the following. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-8.

  According to the gaming table according to the present invention 1-8, it is possible to notify that the player has performed a disadvantageous game (second game) in a mode that is not embarrassing for the player. Since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is correctly playing the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, a game in the next game state can be enjoyed comfortably while the first game is being correctly performed.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention 1-8 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the second display may be a display relating to the start of the second advantageous gaming state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while the first game is being performed correctly.

  Further, the second display is a display configured by displaying a plurality of scenes, and the display of one of the displays of the plurality of scenes is a display of the first scene, and the plurality of scenes are displayed. The display of one of the scenes is a display of a second scene, and the display of the first scene is a display whose display is started by a certain operation related to the progress of the game, The display of the second scene may be a display in which the display is started by another certain operation related to the progress of the game performed following the certain operation.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while the first game is being performed correctly.

  In addition, a lottery process (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process related to the internal winning of the winning combination and determining the lottery result is provided. A display in which the display mode changes in association with the lottery result in the game in which the display of the second display is started may be used.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably enjoy the game in the next game state while the first game is being performed correctly.

  In addition, a lottery process (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the role and determining the lottery result is provided, In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the second game is higher than the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a game with three cards) after performing the second game (for example, a game with two cards). In some cases, the game can be performed more carefully. Further, even if the game from the determination of the privilege provision to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the count value can be updated, and may be a state in which the winning probability of the replaying game is higher than the normal state.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, may be referred to as “the present invention 1-9”) includes operation means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), a lottery means for performing a lottery process relating to the internal winning of the role, and determining the lottery result (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10), and a normal state (for example, FIG. 6B) Control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) for shifting to one of a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6) and an advantageous state (for example, high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B); A gaming machine provided with privilege providing means (for example, an AT number addition lottery in the AT2 state process A shown in FIG. 23) capable of providing a privilege relating to the advantageous state in the advantageous state, and a counter (for example, FIG. 87 19, 68, etc., and each time a game is played, the count value of the certain counter (hereinafter, referred to as "a certain count value") can be updated. In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, the BB state or the AT1 state shown in FIG. 43 (b) or the like), and the right to shift to the certain advantageous gaming state (for example, the inside of the BB) After the winning or the right to shift to the AT1 state is acquired, a winning notification indicating the acquisition of the right (for example, a bonus confirmation notification bk1 shown in FIG. 87 or a bonus confirmation display (FIG. 68, FIG. 70, etc.) (Display of an image including the character “bonus determined!”) Is started, and the right to shift to the certain advantageous game state is given by a first symbol (for example, FIG. 4 ( a) and shown in FIG. The right (hereinafter referred to as a “first right”, for example, a pseudo bonus 1 shown in FIG. 87) and a second symbol (for example, a Seven 2 symbol shown in FIG. 4A or FIG. 87) ) (Hereinafter, referred to as a “second right”; for example, a pseudo bonus 2 shown in FIG. 87), wherein the second right is more advantageous to the player than the first right. In the state after the execution of the winning notification has been started and the first right has been acquired, the first notification is performed when the first result is determined as a result of the internal winning. Is configured to be able to start, and after the execution of the winning notification is started and the second right is acquired, a second result is determined as a result of the internal winning. Is configured to be able to start execution of the second notification if The first result indicates that the first symbol is displayed when the operation means is operated according to the content of the first notification (for example, the activated line shown in FIG. 87 or FIG. 4B). (Or displayed on a winning line other than the activated line). The second result is displayed when the operating means is operated according to the content of the second notification. (For example, displayed on the activated line (or a winning line other than the activated line) shown in FIG. 87 or FIG. 4B), and after the execution of the winning notification is started and In a certain state from the state in which the first right is acquired to the certain advantageous game state, when the certain count value becomes a certain value (for example, 0), From the state in which the right has been acquired Is configured to be in a state of being acquired, it is the amusement machine according to claim. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-9.

  According to the gaming table according to the present invention 1-9, it is possible to play a game with a sense of expectation even if the game from the determination of the privilege provision to the transition to a certain gaming state becomes long.

  The gaming table according to the present invention 1-9 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the first notification may not be executed when the state in which the first right is acquired is changed to the state in which the second right is acquired.

  In addition, a first game (for example, a three-game bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number, and a second game (for example, two-game bet) in which the bet number of the game medium is a second number Game), the second number is different from the first number, and in the advantageous state (or / and the normal state), the second number is higher than the second game. The first game is a more advantageous game for the player, and the first game is performed after the execution of the winning notification has been started and the first right has been acquired. In this case, the certain count value is configured to be updateable, and the second game is executed after the execution of the winning notification is started and the first right is acquired. If so, the certain count value is not updated. It can have.

  With such a configuration, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure fairness between the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. It becomes possible. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to a player when a game is correctly performed in the first game, it can be expected that a player who has not correctly performed the game corrects the game method. Further, even if the game from the determination of the privilege provision to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  In addition, the operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. It is configured to be able to notify a stop position and a stop order), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (for the advantageous state) For example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18, FIG. 52, or the like is provided, and the count value of the specific counter (hereinafter, “specific count value”) is updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state. It is configured to be able to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end value is determined when the specific count value is satisfied. This is a condition that is satisfied when a certain value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games after shifting to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and the certain counter is the specific counter. A counter related to the advantageous state, wherein the certain count value is a value that can be updated each time a game is performed in the advantageous state, and the first game is executed in the advantageous state. In the case of being, both of the specific count value and the certain count value are configured to be updatable, and when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, Only the specific count value of the specific count value and the certain count value may be configured to be updateable.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure fairness between a player who is correctly playing the first game and a player who is playing the second game. In addition, by giving preferential treatment to a player when a game is correctly performed in the first game, it can be expected that a player who has not correctly performed the game corrects the game method. Further, even if the game from the determination of the privilege provision to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the winning combination includes a re-gaming role capable of performing a game without inserting a game medium, and in a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gaming role in the first game is higher than the winning probability of the re-gaming role. The winning probability of the replaying role in the second game may be configured to be higher.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to return to the first game (for example, a game with three cards) after performing the second game (for example, a game with two cards). In some cases, the game can be performed more carefully. Further, even if the game from the determination of the privilege provision to the transition to a certain game state becomes long, the game can be played with a sense of expectation.

  In addition, the certain control state may be a state in which at least the specific count value can be updated, and may be a state in which the winning probability of the replaying game is higher than the normal state.

[Embodiment 2]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in order to avoid redundant description, only a configuration different from the game console according to the first embodiment will be described in principle. In addition, FIGS. 88 to 96 are used in principle only for the description of the second embodiment, and even if duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, FIGS. The reference numeral 96 is prioritized.

<AT2 state processing A>
First, AT2 state processing A according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the AT2 state processing A according to the second embodiment, and corresponds to the AT2 state processing A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the AT2 state process A according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S1451 to S1453 are added to the AT2 state process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S1451, it is determined whether the LMT standby flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1452, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1453. In step S1452, in the lottery table shown in FIG. 88 (b), the number-of-AT-times addition lottery 1 is performed using the lottery value corresponding to "LMT standby flag off", and the process proceeds to step S1402. On the other hand, in step S1453, in the lottery table shown in FIG. 88 (b), the number-of-AT-times addition lottery 2 is performed using the lottery value corresponding to “LMT standby flag ON”, and the process proceeds to step S1402.

  As described above, in this example, the number of AT-added games in the AT2 state is changed according to the state of the LMT standby flag. Specifically, when the LMT standby flag is off, the number of AT-added games is selected in the range of 0G to 100G according to the internally won combination, but when the LMT standby flag is on, the internally won game is selected. The number of AT-added games is selected in the range of 0G to 10G according to the role. That is, in the AT2 state, when the LMT standby flag is ON (when the state shifts from the AT2 state to the LMT state), the ATMT is lower than when the LMT standby flag is OFF (when the state does not shift from the AT2 state to the LMT state). The number of additional games is configured to be reduced.

<Judge state processing B>
Next, the judge state process B according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 (a) is a flowchart showing a flow of the judgment state processing B according to the second embodiment, and corresponds to the judgment state processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the judgment state processing B according to the second embodiment, the processing of steps S2251 to S2253 is added to the judgment state processing B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S2251, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied. If the correction condition is not satisfied (no correction is necessary), the process proceeds to step S2203, and if the correction condition is satisfied (correction is performed). If necessary, the process proceeds to step S2252.

  Here, the determination as to whether or not the correction condition is satisfied in step S2251 (correction condition determination) is performed in the following procedure. In the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202, one of the AT2 initial numbers specified in the AT2 initial number lottery table shown in FIG. 89B is selected. Subsequently, in the correction condition determination in step S2251, the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of the determination is obtained, and the AT2 selected in the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202 from the value X of the high navigation state counter. The initial count (Y) is subtracted. If the value (XY) after the subtraction is equal to or smaller than the first determination value (100 in this example), it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

  In the correction condition determination in step S2251, the difference number (A) at the time of the determination is obtained, and the difference number (A) is corresponded to the AT2 initial number (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202. The expected number (B) to be subtracted is subtracted. Then, also when the value (AB) after the subtraction is equal to or less than the second determination value (in this example, 1500), it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

  In step 2252, the AT2 correction value is set in the effect state counter. In the next step S2253, the LMT standby flag is set to ON, and the flow advances to step S2204. Here, the AT correction value in step S2252 is calculated by adding a certain value (20 in this example) to the AT2 initial number (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202. Therefore, for example, when the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of the correction condition determination is 100 and the AT2 initial number (Y) selected by the AT2 initial number lottery is 30, the correction condition is satisfied. In step S2252, 50 (= AT2 initial count (Y) 30 + 20 selected in the AT2 initial count lottery) is set as the AT2 correction value.

  In the judge state processing B according to the second embodiment, the lottery value (the number of pullbacks G) is set in the effect state counter in the pullback state in step S2206. However, as shown in FIG. When the lottery value (the number of pull-back G) is 1 G, the degree of expectation for pull-back is higher than when the number is 2 to 9 G.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, the AT2 state processing B according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the flow of the AT2 state processing B according to the second embodiment, and corresponds to the AT2 state processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the AT2 state process B according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S2351 to S2353 are added to the AT2 state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S2351, it is determined whether the LMT standby flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2352. In step S2352, the value of the LMT initial value + 1 is set in the effect state counter. In the next step S2353, the effect state is set to the LMT state, and then the flow proceeds to step 2306.

  As described above, in this example, in the judge state (judgment state processing B shown in FIG. 89), if the effect state is set to the AT2 state and the LMT standby flag is set to ON, the state is changed from the AT2 state. It is configured to shift to the LMT state.

<Retraction state processing B>
Next, the retraction state processing B according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91A is a flowchart showing the flow of the retraction state processing B according to the second embodiment, and corresponds to the retraction state processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the retraction state processing B according to the second embodiment, the processing of steps S2451 to S2453 is added to the retraction state processing B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S2451, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied. If the correction condition is not satisfied (no correction is necessary), the process proceeds to step S2403, and if the correction condition is satisfied (correction is performed). If necessary, the process proceeds to step S2452. Note that the correction condition determination (determination as to whether or not the correction condition is satisfied) performed in step S2451 is the same as step S2251 of the judge state process B described with reference to FIG. Is omitted.

  In step 2452, the AT2 correction value is set in the effect state counter. In the next step S2453, the LMT standby flag is set to ON, and the flow advances to step S2404.

  FIG. 91B is a diagram showing an example of transition of the AT state in the high navigation state. FIG. 91 (b) (1) shows a typical transition example of the AT state, in which the transition is performed in the order of the AT1 state (20G) → the AT2 state (30G to 100G).

  On the other hand, FIGS. 91 (b) and (2) show another example of the transition of the AT state, in which the state is the AT1 state (20G) → judge state → AT2 state (30G to 100G) → retraction state → AT2 state (10G). It is an example of shifting in order. In this example, the AT2 state shifted from the retraction state is more disadvantageous for the player than the AT1 state. Note that the number of games in the AT2 state shifted from the retraction state is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, 10G to 50G.

  FIGS. 91 (b) and (3) show other transition examples of the AT state, in which the AT1 state (20G) → the judge state → the AT2 state (30G to 100G) → the retraction state → the AT3 state (10G). It is an example of shifting in order. In the present example, the AT state shifted from the retraction state is the AT3 state different from the AT1 state and the AT2 state, and is more disadvantageous for the player than the AT1 state. Note that the number of games in the AT3 state shifted from the retraction state is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, 10G to 50G.

<Specific examples of various effects, various displays, etc.>
Next, specific examples of various effects, various displays, and the like executed by the slot machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 92 to 96 are timing charts each showing a flow of the effect, and show the effect form of the effect to be executed in association with the timing chart.

<AT2 state → Judge state → Pull back state → Low navigation state>
FIG. 92 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of the effect when the effect state transitions from the AT2 state, the judge state, and the withdrawal state in the high navigation state in the order of the low navigation state to the normal state.

  The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2. In the game R328, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. , An AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) indicating a stop operation is executed, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (an effect state counter) is executed. Is displayed, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display including the character “LAST 2G”) is executed. .

  The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is one. In the game R327, while performing the AT2 effect and the operation navigation in the same manner as the game R328, a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, Display of an image including the characters “LAST 1G”).

  The following game R326 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 326 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R326, an AT2 effect is executed and an operation navigation is executed in the same manner as in the game R328 to the game R327, and a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is displayed. In the example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 0G” is executed.

  In addition, in the game R326, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the game R326 is the final game in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. , An AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is displayed, and the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of game media obtained) in the AT2 state is executed, while the remaining game number in the AT2 state ( The display including the image indicating the effect state counter value (in this example, the display including the image of “LAST 0G”) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted.

  The following game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is nine. In the game R325, the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the judge state using the effect image display device 157 until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)). Since the transition to the state has started, the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started, and since the number of remaining games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 10, the number of games (effect state counter (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 10G”).

  Then, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R325 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is determined to be the judge state using the effect image display device 157. Since the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, and the remaining game number in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 9, the image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 9G”).

  The games R315 to R314 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 315 to 314, and the number of remaining games in the retraction state shifted from the judge state is 1 to 0. In this game R315 to game R314, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the judge state using the effect image display device 157. Since the state has shifted to the retraction state, a normal screen (retraction) corresponding to the retraction state is displayed. After the end of the game R314, the retraction state of the high navigation state ends, the state shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, and the effect image display device 157 is used to display the normal screen corresponding to the normal state of the low navigation state ( (Normal) is displayed.

  The display mode of the normal screen (normal) may be at least partially the same as the display mode of the normal screen (pull-back), or may be entirely different from the display mode of the normal screen (pull-back). In addition, when displaying a screen having the same display mode, it is preferable that the probability that the screen be displayed in the retracted state is higher than the probability that the screen is displayed in the low navigation state.

<AT2 state → LMT state → Low navigation state>
FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram illustrating a flow of the effect when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the LMT state in the order of the high navigation state and then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state.

  The game R69 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 69 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In the game R69, an AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed in the same manner as the previous games R71 to R70, and a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state. (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 0G”) is executed.

  Further, in the game R69, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the game R69 is the final game in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. , An AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is displayed, and the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of game media obtained) in the AT2 state is executed, while the remaining game number in the AT2 state ( The display including the image indicating the effect state counter value (in this example, the display including the image of “LAST 0G”) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted.

  The game R68 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 68, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state is 19. In the game R68, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has been made, an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) indicating a stop operation is executed, and the LMT operation is performed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (effect state counter) Is displayed (in this example, an image including the characters “20/20”) is displayed. Note that the filling of the operation navigation indicates that the stop operation has not been performed yet at the same timing.

  Thereafter, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R68 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157, Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed and the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19, the LMT state (In this example, display of an image including the characters "remaining 19/20") including an image indicating the total number of games in and the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the LMT state. I have. Since the flow of the effects of the game R67 to the game R50 is almost the same, the description is omitted.

  The game R49 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 49 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0. In the game R49, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) in the judge state is 0. A display including an image indicating the total number of games in the state and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) (display of an image including the characters “0/20” in this example) is executed. ing.

  After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R49 (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the game is the final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state, the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, display of the number of game media acquired, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) is performed, while the LMT state is displayed. In this example, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in the present example, the display of the image including the characters “0/20”) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. After the end of the game R49, the LMT state of the high navigation state ends, the state shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, and the effect image display device 157 is used to display the normal screen corresponding to the normal state of the low navigation state ( (Normal) is displayed.

  In this example, after the second advantageous game state (AT2 state in this example) ends, it is configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous game state (judge state or pullback state in this example). After the third advantageous game state (in this example, the LMT state) is completed, the state is shifted to the normal state (in this example, the low navigation state), and the effect in the second advantageous game state (in this example) In this case, the mode of the AT2 effect) is different from the mode of the effect (in this example, the ED effect) in the third advantageous gaming state.

  According to this example, since the advantageous game state that can be expected can be easily understood, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

<AT2 state → Judge state → Pullback state → AT2 state>
FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of the effect when the effect state changes in the order of AT2 state → judgment state → retracted state → AT2 state in the high navigation state, using FIG. 92 (a). The continuation of the described effect is shown.

  The game R315 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 315, and the number of remaining games in the retraction state after shifting from the judge state is one, and is a specific rare role (in this example, small role 2 or small role). This is a game in which the game is shifted to the AT2 state from the next game due to the internal winning in 3). In the game R315, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the judge state to the retracted state using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has been made, the normal screen (retraction) corresponding to the retraction state is displayed.

  The subsequent game R314 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 314, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state shifted from the retraction state is nine. In the game R314, until the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect state is changed from the judge state to AT2 using the effect image display device 157. Since the state has shifted to the AT2 state, the AT2 effect corresponding to the start of the AT2 state is started, and the remaining game number (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state before the update is 50. The display including the image indicating the effect state counter value (display of the image including the character “50G” in this example) is executed.

  Thereafter, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R314 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. Since the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed and the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is 49, the image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 49G”).

  In the present example, when shifting from the retraction state to the AT state, a shift is made to the AT2 state, which is more advantageous to the player than the AT1 state. Although illustration is omitted, in the case of performing a bet game of three after performing a bet game of two in the withdrawal state, the state shifts to another high navigation state (for example, the LMT state) without shifting to the AT2 state. May be. Although illustration is omitted, in the case where the game of two bets is continued in the withdrawal state, the high-navigation state may be ended and the low-navigation state may be shifted without shifting to the AT2 state.

<AT2 state → LMT state → Low navigation state → Normal state → Confirmation notification state → AT1 state>
FIG. 93 (b) shows that, in the high navigation state, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the LMT state in the order, then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, shifts to the high navigation state again, and the effect state changes to the normal state. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flow of the effect when the transition is made in the order of the fixed notification state → the AT1 state, and shows a continuation of the effect described with reference to FIG. 92 (b).

  In this example, after transitioning to the normal state of the low navigation state, the state transitions to the high navigation state again, and the effect state transitions in the order of the normal state, the confirmed notification state, and the AT1 state.

  The game R658 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 658, and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state which has shifted from the final notification state is 19. In the game R658, until the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the press operation of the start lever 135 is received (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect image display device 157 is used to change the effect state from the finalized notification state. Since the state has shifted to the AT1 state, an AT1 effect corresponding to the start of the AT1 state is started, and the remaining game number (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT1 state before updating is 20, so that the game number The display including the image indicating the (count value of the effect state counter) (display of the image including the character “20G” in this example) is executed.

  Thereafter, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R658 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the AT1 state using the effect image display device 157. Since the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state is executed and the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT1 state is 19, the image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 19G”).

  In this example, after the second advantageous game state (AT2 state in this example) ends, it is configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous game state (judge state or pullback state in this example). After the third advantageous game state (in this example, the LMT state) is completed, the state is shifted to the normal state (in this example, the low navigation state), and the effect in the second advantageous game state (in this example) Then, the mode of the AT2 effect) is different from the mode of the effect (the ED effect in this example) in the third advantageous game state, and the operation information is changed from the fourth advantageous game state (the judge state or the pullback state). When the game state shifts to the game state in which the game state can be notified, the game state shifts to the second advantageous game state (AT2 state), and from the state after the third advantageous game state (LMT state) ends. Transition to a game state that can notify operation information Case, (in this example, AT1 state) first advantageous gaming state is configured to shift to.

  According to this example, since the advantageous game state that can be expected can be easily understood, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, expectations can be given even after the end of the advantageous gaming state that can be expected.

  Further, in this example, when shifting from the LMT state to the low navigation state, shifting to the high navigation state again, and shifting to the AT state in the high navigation state, the AT1 state is more disadvantageous to the player than the AT2 state. It is configured to migrate.

<Notification at the time of winning combination in AT2 state>
FIG. 94 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of notification when a winning combination is established in the AT2 state.

  The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 2. In the game R328, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. , An AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) indicating a stop operation of the pushing sequence is executed, and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state is executed. Since the (count value of the effect state counter) is 2, a display including an image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including characters of “LAST 2G”) is displayed. Running.

  The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327, and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is increased from 1 to 51. In the game R327, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. , An AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and a non-specifiable display g2 (in this example, “!-!-!” Is displayed in which the internally won combination (eg, the watermelon of the small combination 3) cannot be identified. ), And since the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state before the addition is 1, a display including an image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (this example) In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 1G” is executed.

  In the game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the effect image is overlap-displayed in the non-specificable display, and then the number of games added to the AT is added. (In this example, the character “+ 50G” is displayed), and the number of remaining games (count value of the production state counter) in the AT2 state has increased from 1 to 51 due to the addition of AT. A display including an image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (display of an image including characters of “LAST 51G” in this example) is executed.

  Note that the display mode of the unspecified display is not limited to this example. For example, the internal winning of the first role or the second role of the same type is displayed as the first unspecified display (for example, “!-!-!”). Display), and the internal election of the same second role or third role is performed by the second non-specifiable display (for example, “?-?-?” Display). You may comprise so that an internal winning may not be specified. In addition, the internal winning of the different first role or fourth role is performed in the first unspecified display (for example, "!-!-!" Display), and the same second role or third role is displayed. May be configured such that the internal winning of any combination cannot be specified by performing the internal winning of the second in the non-specification display (for example, the display of “?-?-?”).

<Notification at the time of winning combination in LMT state>
FIG. 94 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of notification when a winning combination is established in the LMT state.

  The game R50 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 50 and the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1. In the game R50, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. , An ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state, and an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” having the same display mode as the operation navigation in the AT2 state) indicating a stop operation of the pushing sequence. Is displayed), the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 2. Therefore, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of games in the LMT state Display including an image indicating the remaining number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters “remaining 2/20”) Running.

  Further, in the game R50, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a certain time has elapsed since the press operation of the start lever 135 was received), the effect image display device 157 is used. In addition to executing the identifiable display g1 (in this example, displaying a watermelon symbol) capable of specifying the internally won combination (for example, the watermelon of the small combination 3), the number of remaining games in the LMT state (production state counter) Is displayed, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display including the character of “1/20”) is executed. ing.

  Further, in the game R327, the identifiable display is deleted when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received). Note that, in this example, unlike the notification at the time of the formation of the combination in the AT2 state described with reference to FIG. 94 (a), it indicates that there is no AT addition (restricted).

  In this example, after the second advantageous game state (AT2 state in this example) ends, it is configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous game state (judge state or withdrawal state in this example). After the third advantageous game state (in this example, the LMT state) is completed, the state is shifted to the normal state (in this example, the low navigation state), and the effect in the second advantageous game state (in this example) In this case, the mode of the AT2 effect) is different from the mode of the effect (the ED effect in the present example) in the third advantageous game state, and the lottery result is the first in the third advantageous game state (LMT state). In the case of the role (in this example, the small role 2 (watermelon 1)), the first notification (in this example, the display of the watermelon symbol) capable of specifying the first role can be reported. In the second advantageous game state (AT2 state), the lottery result is the first position. Case, (in this example, "! -! -!" Display) a second notification indicating that the chances are informed configured to be able to.

  According to this example, since the advantageous game state that can be expected can be easily understood, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, in the advantageous game state that can be expected, the player is allowed to play the game with a sense of expectation. Can be done.

  The display mode of the identifiable display is not limited to this example. For example, characters indicating the name of a role (for example, characters “Rep” indicating a replay, characters “watermelon” indicating a small combination 3) ) May be displayed, or some or all of the symbol combinations corresponding to the winning combination may be displayed. In addition, the display area, display position, display size, display timing, presentation style, and the like of each display may be different between the non-specifiable display and the specifiable display.

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number>
Next, a specific example of the correction of the AT2 initial number of times described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90 will be described.

<Specific Example of Correction of AT2 Initial Number / When Correction is Performed>
FIG. 95 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of an effect when correcting the initial number of AT2.
The game R120 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 120 and the number of remaining games in the judge state is 0. In the game R120, in the judge state process B described with reference to FIG. 89A, after performing the AT2 initial number lottery, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied in the correction condition determination, and the AT2 initial number is corrected. ing. Specifically, the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of the correction condition determination is 120, the AT2 initial number (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery is 30, and “X (= 120) −Y Since the correction condition of (= 30) <= 100 is satisfied, Y (= 30) + 20 = 50 is set as the AT2 correction value, and the LMT standby flag is set to ON.

  The game R119 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 119 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state after transition from the judge state is 50. In this game R119, in the AT2 state process A described with reference to FIG. 88 (a), the LMT standby flag is on, so that the AT number addition lottery 2 is performed. The watermelon 1) is internally won, and 0G is selected as the number of AT-added games.

  Further, in the game R119, until the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received (immediately after BET, etc.)), the effect state is determined to be the judge state using the effect image display device 157. , The AT2 effect corresponding to the start of the AT2 state is started, and the remaining game number (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state before the update is 50. The display including the image indicating the number (the count value of the effect state counter) (display of the image including the character “50G” in this example) is executed.

  After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R119 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. Since the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed and the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state is 49, the image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 49G”).

  The game R69 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 69 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In the game R69, in the AT2 state processing B described with reference to FIG. 90, since the AT2 state has ended and the LMT standby flag is on, preparation is made to shift the effect state from the AT2 state to the LMT state. ing. In the game R69, an AT2 effect is performed and the operation navigation is executed in the same manner as the games R119 to R70, while the display including an image indicating the remaining game number (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state. (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 0G”) is executed.

  Further, in the game R69, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the game is the final game in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. , An AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is displayed, and the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of game media obtained) in the AT2 state is executed, while the remaining game number in the AT2 state ( The display including the image indicating the effect state counter value (in this example, the display including the image of “LAST 0G”) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. In the present example, the result display 1 may not be displayed, or the result display 1 may be performed only when the correction of the AT2 initial number is not performed.

  In this example, since the AT2 initial number is corrected, the AT2 state and the LMT state can be transitioned seamlessly (without passing through another effect state).

<Specific Example of Correction of AT2 Initial Number / When Displaying Number of Remaining Games in AT2 State>
FIG. 95 (b) is a diagram showing a flow of the effect in the case where the remaining number of games is displayed in the AT2 state.
The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 52. In this game R328, the AT number addition lottery 1 is performed in the AT2 state process A described with reference to FIG. 88 (a) because the LMT standby flag is off. The watermelon 1) was internally won, and 50G was selected as the number of games added to the AT.

  In the game R328, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect image display device 157 is used to execute the AT2 effect and perform the operation. While performing the navigation, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (display of the image including the characters “LAST 52G” in this example) is not performed. As a fake display (glance display), a display (in this example, “LAST 2G”) including an image indicating the number of remaining games (2 in this example) before adding the number of games added to the AT (50 in this example) Display of an image including the character ").

  The following game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 51. In this game R327, an AT2 effect is executed using the effect image display device 157 in the same manner as in the game R328, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received). While performing the operation navigation, display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (display of an image including the characters “LAST 51G” in this example) is performed. Instead, a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (1 in this example) before adding the number of AT-added games (50 in this example) as a fake display (gase display) (in this example, Display of an image including the characters “LAST 1G”).

  Further, in the game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a certain time has elapsed from the pressing operation of the start lever 135), a display suggesting the addition to the AT (in this example, " (Display of characters "will continue more"), and then, when another certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), a display (notifying the number of AT-added games) is displayed. In this example, a display of characters “+ 50G” is performed, and a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the true (true) AT2 state (in this example, “LAST 51G”). Display of an image including the character ").

<Specific Example of Correction of AT2 Initial Number / When Displaying Result at AT2 State Transition>
FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing a flow of the effect when displaying the result after the transition to the AT2 state.
The game R326 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 326 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In the game R326, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to trigger the AT2 in the same manner as the games R328 to R327. While performing the effect and performing the operation navigation, a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (display of an image including the characters “LAST 0G” in this example) Running).

  Further, in the game R326, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is received), the effect image display device 157 is used as the final game in the AT2 state. While the display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, the execution of the result display 1 (for example, the display of the acquired number of game media) in the AT2 state is not executed.

  The following game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 325 and the number of remaining games in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state is nine. In the game R325, the result display 1 in the AT2 state is performed using the effect image display device 157 until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.)). For example, display of the acquired number of game media) is executed, and when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received), the effect image display device 157 is used to Since the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started and the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the judge state is 9, an image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 9G”).

<Specific Example of Correction of AT2 Initial Number / If Result Display is not Performed After AT2 State>
FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing a flow of the effect when the result display is not performed after the end of the AT2 state, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 95 (a).
In the effect described with reference to FIG. 95 (a), in the game R69, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state since the final game in the AT2 state. The example in which the result display 1 (for example, the display of the number of game media obtained) in the AT2 state is executed has been described, but in this example, the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state in the same game R69. Is displayed, while the result display 1 (for example, the display of the acquired number of game media) in the AT2 state is not executed.

  According to the present example, the transition from the AT2 state to the LMT state can be performed seamlessly (without passing through another effect state) from the AT2 state to the LMT state, and the result display in the AT2 state is not performed at the time of the transition. It is possible to give a comprehensive impression of the effect in the high navigation state without making the player more conscious of the transition of the game than necessary.

  As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “the present invention 2-1”) operates the operating means (for example, shown in FIG. 1). (The stop buttons 137 to 139), and shifts to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). And a control unit (e.g., the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) for controlling the operation of the operation unit (e.g., using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45). 52. The information indicating the stop position and the stop order of each reel, such as the operation navigation, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, and the like, can be notified. Regarding notification of operation information The state is more advantageous than the state, and includes a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 52), and each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the specific counter It is configured to be able to update the count value of, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state, and the certain end condition is that the count value is This is a condition that is satisfied when the first specific value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games since the transition to the advantageous state has reached the upper limit number). It is configured to be able to shift to any of the advantageous gaming states among the advantageous gaming states, and one of the plurality of the advantageous gaming states is an advantageous gaming state capable of notifying the operation information ( Below, it is referred to as a “second advantageous game state.” For example, a second advantageous game state shown in FIG. 97 or an AT2 state shown in FIG. The advantageous gaming state is a certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as a “third advantageous gaming state”) that can notify the operation information and is different from the second advantageous gaming state. For example, FIG. (3rd advantageous game state and LMT state shown in FIG. 6 (b) and the like), and one of the plurality of advantageous game states is the second advantageous game state and the third advantageous game state. In a certain advantageous gaming state different from any of the gaming states (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth advantageous gaming state”; for example, a fourth advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 97 or a pull-back state shown in FIG. 6 (b)). The fourth advantageous gaming state includes the second advantageous gaming state and the fourth advantageous gaming state. The third advantageous gaming state is a disadvantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous in reporting the operation information than any of the three advantageous gaming states, and the third advantageous gaming state is such that the count value is a second specific value (for example, 19). ) Is a gaming state in which it is possible to shift from the second advantageous gaming state, and is an advantageous gaming state in which it is possible to stay until the count value reaches the first specific value; The specific value and the second specific value are different values, and are configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous game state after the second advantageous game state ends, and the third advantageous game state is provided. After the advantageous game state is completed, the normal state is established, and the effect is produced in the second advantageous game state (for example, the AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 97 or the AT2 effect shown in FIG. 92). In the mode of the third aspect, in the third advantageous game state, That effect (for example, ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 97, ED effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.) are different aspects and embodiments of it is the amusement machine according to claim. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 2-1.

  According to the gaming table according to the invention 2-1 of the present application, the expected advantageous gaming state can be easily understood, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation.

  Note that one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is an advantageous gaming state that is capable of notifying the operation information and is different from any of the second and third advantageous gaming states. (Hereinafter, referred to as “first advantageous gaming state”), and the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous in reporting the operation information than the second advantageous gaming state. Good.

  In addition, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the present invention 2-2”) includes operating means (for example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), a control state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, a game console provided with a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3 and operation information of the operation means (for example, an operation navigation using a payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 52, etc., which can identify the stop position and the stop order of each reel, such as an operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc., and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. More advantageous than the normal state State, and includes a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 52), and updates the count value of the specific counter every time a game is played in the advantageous state. Is configured to be able to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, wherein the certain end condition is such that the count value is equal to a first specific value. This is a condition that is satisfied when a value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games since the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and in the advantageous state, a plurality of advantageous gaming states It is configured to be able to shift to any of the advantageous game states, and one of the plurality of advantageous game states is a certain advantageous game state capable of notifying the operation information (hereinafter, referred to as “first game state”). of For example, a first advantageous game state shown in FIG. 98 or an AT1 state shown in FIG. 6B), and one of the plurality of advantageous game states is an advantageous game state. A certain advantageous game state (hereinafter, referred to as a “second advantageous game state”) different from the first advantageous game state, which can notify the operation information. For example, a second advantageous game state shown in FIG. , AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 (b), etc.), wherein one of the plurality of advantageous game states is the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state capable of notifying the operation information. In a certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as a “third advantageous gaming state”; a third advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 98 or an LMT state shown in FIG. 6B). And one of the plurality of advantageous game states is the advantageous game state. A certain advantageous game state different from any one of the one advantageous game state, the second advantageous game state, and the third advantageous game state (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth advantageous game state”). 98 (a pull-back state shown in FIG. 6B or the like), wherein the fourth advantageous game state is the first advantageous game state, and the second advantageous game state. And the third advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous in reporting the operation information than any of the advantageous gaming states. In the third advantageous gaming state, the count value is a second specific value ( For example, in the case of 19), the game state is a game state in which the game can shift from the second advantageous game state, and the game state can stay until the count value reaches the first specific value. The one specific value and the second specific value are different values, and are configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous game state after the second advantageous game state ends, and After the third advantageous game state is over, the normal state is established. The mode of the effect in the second advantageous game state (for example, the AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 98 and the AT2 effect in FIG. 92) is the effect in the third advantageous game state (for example, FIG. 98 is different from the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 98 or the ED effect shown in FIG. 92 and the like, and the second advantageous game state is a more advantageous gaming state than the first advantageous gaming state. In the case of shifting from the fourth advantageous gaming state to a gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, it is configured to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state is The gaming table is configured to shift to the first advantageous gaming state when shifting from the state after the end to the gaming state where the operation information can be notified. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 2-2 of the present application.

  According to the gaming table according to the invention 2-2 of the present application, the expected advantageous gaming state can be easily understood, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, expectations can be given even after the end of the advantageous gaming state that can be expected.

  In addition, a game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the present invention 2-3”) includes operation means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), a control state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) or an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). For example, a game console provided with a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3 and operation information of the operation means (for example, an operation navigation using a payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 52, etc., which can identify the stop position and the stop order of each reel, such as an operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc., and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. More advantageous than the normal state State, and includes a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 52), and updates the count value of the specific counter every time a game is played in the advantageous state. Is configured to be able to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, wherein the certain end condition is such that the count value is equal to a first specific value. This is a condition that is satisfied when a value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games since the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and in the advantageous state, a plurality of advantageous gaming states It is configured to be able to shift to any of the advantageous game states, and one of the plurality of advantageous game states is a certain advantageous game state capable of notifying the operation information (hereinafter, “second advantageous game state” of For example, a second advantageous game state shown in FIG. 99 or an AT2 state shown in FIG. 6B), and one of the plurality of advantageous game states is an advantageous game state. A certain advantageous game state (hereinafter, referred to as a "third advantageous game state") different from the second advantageous game state, which can notify the operation information. For example, a third advantageous game state shown in FIG. , LMT state shown in FIG. 6 (b), etc.), wherein one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is different from any of the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state. A certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth advantageous gaming state”; for example, a fourth advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 99 or a withdrawal state shown in FIG. 6B); The advantageous game state includes the second advantageous game state and the third advantageous game state. In the third advantageous game state, the count value is a second specific value (for example, 19), which is a disadvantageous game state that is more disadvantageous in reporting the operation information than any of the advantageous game states. In the case, it is a gaming state that can be shifted from the second advantageous gaming state, and is an advantageous gaming state in which the count value can stay until the count value reaches the first specific value, and the first specific value and The second specific value is another value, and is configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous game state after the second advantageous game state ends, and the third advantageous game state is After the game is over, the normal state is established. The mode of the effect in the second advantageous game state (for example, the AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 99 or the AT2 effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.) Production in the third advantageous game state (for example, The ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 99 and the ED effect shown in FIG. 92 and the like are different from each other. In the third advantageous game state, the lottery result is the first combination (for example, as shown in FIG. 5). In the case of the small role 2 (watermelon 1), the first notification that can specify the first role (for example, the second image g1 shown in FIG. 99 or the identifiable display shown in FIG. 94 (b)) g1 (display of a watermelon symbol)), and in the second advantageous game state, when the lottery result is the first combination, a second notification indicating a chance. (For example, the second image g2 shown in FIG. 99 or the unspecifiable display g2 (“! -! -! ") Can be notified. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 2-3 of the present application.

  According to the gaming table according to the invention 2-3 of the present application, the advantageous game state that can be expected can be easily understood, so that the player can play the game with a sense of expectation. In addition, in the advantageous game state that can be expected, the player is allowed to play the game with a sense of expectation. Can be done.

  The gaming tables according to the present inventions 2-1 to 2-3 are not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, there is provided a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process relating to the internal winning of the role and determining the lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first role, May be notified, and the certain notification mode in the third advantageous game state may be different from the certain notification mode in the second advantageous game state. .

  Further, when the lottery result is a second combination (for example, a small combination 4 (bell) shown in FIG. 5A or FIG. 7), the operation information can be notified, and the third combination is notified. The mode of reporting the operation information of the second role in the advantageous gaming state may be the same as the mode of reporting the operation information of the second role in the second favorable gaming state.

  With such a configuration, since the operation navigation mode does not change depending on the type of the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to prevent the player from dropping the pushing sequence and to maintain the player's willingness to play. Further, since the advantageous game state that can be expected can be easily understood, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

  Note that the operation information may be information that can identify a stop position and a stop order of each reel that can display a combination of symbols according to the second combination.

  In the second advantageous gaming state, the number of remaining games in the second advantageous gaming state is configured to be increased, and in the third advantageous gaming state, the number of remaining games in the third advantageous gaming state is increased. It may be configured such that the number of remaining games is not increased.

  With such a configuration, in the advantageous gaming state of the restricted state, the advantageous state can be comfortably ended without unnecessarily fanning the player. Further, since the advantageous game state that can be expected can be easily understood, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

  In addition, it is configured that a display indicating that the number of remaining games in the second advantageous game state is increased may be performed, and the number of remaining games in the third advantageous game state may be increased. May be configured so as not to be displayed.

  Further, when the second advantageous game state ends, a certain end display (for example, an AT end screen indicating the end of the AT2 state shown in FIG. 92 or the like) can be displayed, and the second advantageous game state can be displayed. A process of restricting the transition to the third advantageous game state after the transition to the second advantageous game state and before the certain end display relating to the second advantageous game state is displayed. (For example, the processing using the LMT standby flag described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91) may be configured to be executable.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the profit in the advantageous gaming state that can be expected cannot be fully taken out, satisfy the satisfaction of the player, and as a result, give the player a sense of expectation It becomes possible. Further, since the advantageous game state that can be expected can be easily understood, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

  In addition, a certain freeze effect may be executed when shifting to the third advantageous game state.

  With such a configuration, an advantageous game state that should not be expected can be easily understood, and thus it is possible to give an opportunity for the player to change his / her feeling. Further, since the advantageous game state that can be expected can be easily understood, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

  The initial remaining number of games in the second advantageous game state is variable (for example, the number of games determined by the AT2 initial number lottery in FIG. 89 (a), or the number of games corrected by the number of games shown in FIG. 89 (b)). Number), and the initial remaining number of games in the third advantageous game state may be fixed (for example, 20G).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably end the advantageous state without fanning in the advantageous gaming state in the restricted state. Further, since the advantageous game state that can be expected can be easily understood, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

  In addition, in the second advantageous game state, a display indicating the number of times less than the actual remaining number of games in the second advantageous game state (for example, a gap display of the number of remaining games shown in FIG. 95 (b) or the like) (Fake display)) may be displayed, and a display indicating the number of times in the third advantageous game state smaller than the actual remaining number of games in the third advantageous game state. May not be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to comfortably end the advantageous state without fanning in the advantageous gaming state in the restricted state. Further, since the advantageous game state that can be expected can be easily understood, it is possible to make the player play the game with a sense of expectation.

  Further, in one advantageous state, after the third advantageous game state ends, there may be no case where a transition to the fourth advantageous game state (for example, a withdrawal state) occurs.

  In addition, a first game (for example, a three-game bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number, and a second game (for example, two-game bet) in which the bet number of the game medium is a second number Game), the second number is different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. It is a game, and it may be configured such that when the second game is performed, there is no case where the transition to the second advantageous game state is started.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp whether the player is playing the first game or the second game depending on whether or not the game is shifted to the second advantageous game state. In some cases, it may be possible to notice that the first game is a more advantageous game for the player than the second game.

  In addition, when not shifting from the fourth advantageous game state to the advantageous game state in which the operation information can be notified, the game apparatus may be configured to be able to shift to the normal state.

  Further, the above-mentioned "the second advantageous gaming state is a more advantageous gaming state than the first advantageous gaming state," means "acquisition of a game medium in one of the first advantageous gaming states". The expected expected value of the game medium in the one second advantageous gaming state is higher than the expected value. "

  Further, the above-mentioned "fourth advantageous game state is a notification of the operation information more than any one of the first advantageous game state, the second advantageous game state, and the third advantageous game state. The fourth advantageous gaming state is a disadvantageous gaming state disadvantageous with respect to, and "the fourth advantageous gaming state is any one of the first advantageous gaming state, the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state. The operation information is reported less frequently than the game state, or the operation information is in an advantageous game state in which the operation information is not reported. "

[Embodiment 3]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
In addition, in order to avoid redundant description, only configurations that are different from the gaming tables according to the first and second embodiments will be described in principle. In addition, FIGS. 100 to 107 are used only in principle for the description of the third embodiment, and even if duplicate reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the third embodiment will be made with reference to FIGS. The reference numeral 107 is prioritized.

<Various operations>
First, various operations that can be performed in the slot machine according to the third embodiment will be described.
The slot machine according to the third embodiment includes a start lever 135, stop buttons 137 to 139, bet buttons 130 to 132, a medal return button 133, a settlement button 134 described with reference to FIG. 1, and a cross key 192 shown in FIG. And operation means such as a PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 102, and various operations can be performed by these operation means. Further, in addition to various operations by these operation means, an insertion operation by inserting medals from the medal insertion slot 141 is also possible.

  Hereinafter, the operation using the start lever 135 may be referred to as “lever operation”, the operation using the push button 194 may be referred to as “PUSH button operation”, and the operation using the cross key 192 may be referred to as “cross key operation”.

<State transition of various operations>
Next, an example of state transition of various operations will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a state transition of the push button operation, the cross key operation, the insertion operation, and the lever operation.

  In FIG. 100, the state indicated by “〇” is a state in which reception of various operations is valid, and the state indicated by “×” in FIG. 100 is a state in which reception of various operations is invalid. The slot machine according to the third embodiment is configured to determine whether various operations are valid or invalid according to the state transitions shown in the figure, and to display a corresponding display when the operations are valid.

  For example, when the previous game is non-replay, the selection screen is displayed (or is not displayed), and the setting screen is not displayed, the operation using the cross key 192 corresponding to “call setting screen” is effective. When the operation is accepted, the display of the setting screen is started (the setting screen is called). However, since the push button operation, the closing operation, and the lever operation are invalid, even if the operation is performed, The display of the setting screen does not start (the setting screen is not called).

  In addition, when the previous game is non-replay, the selection screen is not displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, the input operation corresponding to “AT2 type determination” is valid. Performs an AT2 effect character determination (AT2 type determination), which will be described later. Since the push button operation, the cross key operation, and the lever operation are invalid, the AT2 effect character is not affected even if the operation is performed. No decision (AT2 type decision) is made.

  On the other hand, when the previous game is non-replay, the selection screen is displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, the PUSH button operation is also effective in addition to the insertion operation corresponding to “AT2 type determination”. Even when the button operation is received, the character of the AT2 effect is determined (AT2 type determination).

  When the previous game is non-replay, the selection screen is not displayed, and the setting screen is displayed, all of the push button operation, the cross key operation, the insertion operation, and the lever operation corresponding to “AT2 type determination” are performed. Since the character is invalid, the character cannot be determined. However, the character is valid except for the lever operation corresponding to “AT2 type selection screen display”, so that the character can be selected by an operation other than the lever operation.

  When the previous game is replay, the selection screen is not displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, the lever operation corresponding to “AT2 type determination” is valid. , The AT2 effect character is determined (AT2 type determination). However, since the push button operation, the cross key operation, and the insertion operation are invalid, the AT2 effect character is determined (AT2 effect) even if the operation is performed. Type determination) is not performed.

  On the other hand, when the previous game is replay, the selection screen is being displayed, and the setting screen is not being displayed, the PUSH button operation is also effective in addition to the insertion operation corresponding to “AT2 type determination”. Even when the operation is received, the character for the AT2 effect is determined (AT2 type determination). In these cases, the throwing operation is invalid, but the throwing operation may be made valid, and the character of the AT2 effect (AT2 type determination) may be determined when the throwing operation is accepted.

<Specific examples of various operations>
Next, specific examples of various operations including a push button operation, a cross key operation, a closing operation, and a lever operation will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 101A is a diagram showing an example of various operations for switching the display between the normal screen and the demonstration screen in chronological order.
In this example, when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the normal screen is displayed using the effect image display device 157, the display of the setting screen is started. Here, the setting screen is a screen for performing various settings relating to the slot machine (for example, adjustment of volume, adjustment of light amount, display of model information, and the like).

  The condition for starting the display of the setting screen is not particularly limited, but in this example, the display of the setting screen is started only when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received during the non-game, and the game is started. When the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received, the display of the setting screen is not started.

  When the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the setting screen is being displayed, the display of the demonstration screen is started. Here, the demonstration screen is a screen mainly displayed during a non-game, for example, a screen displaying an introduction of a new model, an advertisement of a game store, or the like. When the operation of inserting the medals into the medal insertion slot 141 is received while the demonstration screen is being displayed, the display of the normal screen is started (the demo screen returns to the normal screen).

FIG. 101 (B) is a diagram showing an example of various operations in a time series when adjusting the volume using the setting screen.
In this example, when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the normal screen is displayed using the effect image display device 157, the display of the setting screen is started. When the operation of the up button 192b (or the down button 192c) of the cross key 192 is received while the setting screen is displayed, the cursor (arrow) displayed on the setting screen moves upward (or downward). In this example, since the operation of the up button 192b has been received on the setting screen, the cursor has been moved upward to the volume adjustment position.

  When the cursor is moved to a certain menu, display of a submenu corresponding to the cursor is started. In this example, since the cursor has been moved to the position of the volume adjustment, the display of the volume adjustment screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is started. When the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted, and the adjusted volume is displayed by the volume meter. . In this example, since the operation of the right button 192d is received once on the volume adjustment screen, the volume is increased by one level (in this example, the volume is increased from level 3 to level 4 in five levels of levels 1 to 5). ), The adjusted volume (level 4) is displayed by the volume meter.

  If the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received during the display of the volume adjustment screen, the volume adjustment ends and the screen returns to the setting screen. In this example, since the operation of the determination button 192a is received after the adjustment of the volume, the volume adjustment is ended, and the display of the volume adjustment screen is switched to the display of the setting screen. Subsequently, since the operation of the down button 192c on the setting screen is received, the cursor is moved downward to the position of “return”. Note that the subsequent operation and display are the same as in the example described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 101C is a diagram showing an example of various operations in the case of performing volume adjustment without displaying the setting screen in chronological order.
In this example, when the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is received while the normal screen is displayed using the effect image display device 157, the display of the volume adjustment screen is started.

  Note that the condition for starting the display of the volume adjustment screen is not particularly limited. In this example, the volume adjustment screen is displayed only when the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is received during the non-game. Is started, and when the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is received during the game, the display of the volume adjustment screen is not started.

  When the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted, and the adjusted volume is displayed by the volume meter. This is similar to the example described with reference to FIG. When the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the volume adjustment ends, and the screen returns to the volume adjustment end screen indicating that the volume has been determined. When the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the volume adjustment end screen is being displayed, the display of the demonstration screen is started.

FIGS. 101 (D) and (E) are diagrams showing an example of other various operations in chronological order.
In the example described with reference to FIG. 101A, when the operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is received during the display of the demo screen, the display of the normal screen starts (the demo screen returns to the normal screen). Although an example has been shown, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), when an operation of inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted while the setting screen is being displayed, the display of the normal screen starts (from the demo screen to the normal screen). (Return to the screen).

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 101 (B), when the operation of inserting the medals into the medal insertion slot 141 is received during the display of the demo screen after the volume adjustment, the display of the normal screen is started (the demo screen). (FIG. 101 (E)), when the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 141 is received during the display of the volume adjustment screen as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the normal screen is displayed. It may be configured to start (return to the normal screen from the demo screen). In this case, if the input operation is received after the volume adjustment end screen is displayed, the volume may not be determined because the volume has not been determined, or the volume adjustment end screen may be configured. May be adjusted before the display (even before the volume is determined), at the time of the insertion operation at the volume displayed on the volume adjustment screen.

<Specific example of character select operation>
Next, a specific example of a character selection operation (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “character selection operation”) will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 to 105.
Here, the character selection operation is an operation for selecting a character to appear in various effects according to the player's preference. In the slot machine according to the third embodiment, the character selection operation is performed by the various operations described above. It can be performed.

<Specific example of character selection operation / Example in which a character cannot be selected by the player's intention>
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing, in chronological order, a character-selling operation when the effect state shifts from the judge state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state, and FIG. FIG.

  In this example, since the operation of the push button 194 is received during the display of the AT2 confirmation display screen indicating that the transition to the AT2 state has been confirmed, the display of the character selection operation screen for performing the character selection operation in the AT2 state is displayed. Has started. The display mode of the character selection operation screen is not particularly limited. In this example, the character selection operation screen is configured so that the player can select a favorite character from the three types of characters A, B, and C. (Default) indicates that the character A is temporarily selected.

  When the operation of the PUSH button 194 is received during the display of the character selection operation screen, the operation becomes a character determination operation, and the character temporarily selected in the character selection operation screen is changed to the character appearing in the AT2 effect executed in the AT2 state. It is determined. Thus, in the AT2 state, an effect by the character determined by the player is started.

  In this example, since the character A is provisionally selected on the character selection operation screen, the character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined as the character A by the character determination operation, and the character A starts the AT2 effect. Subsequently, an insertion operation (or a BET operation) is performed in a state where the AT2 effect has been started, and when a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is received, the first game in the AT2 state is started.

FIG. 102 (B) is a diagram illustrating a second example of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, since the input operation is received during the display of the AT2 confirmation display screen, the default character is displayed without displaying the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character). AT2 production by A has started.

FIG. 102 (C) is a diagram illustrating a third example of the character / selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, while the operation of the PUSH button 194 was received during the display of the AT2 confirmation display screen, the display of the character selection operation screen was started. However, the input operation was received during the display of the character selection operation screen. Thus, the AT2 effect with the default character A has been started without selecting a character on the character selection operation screen (without giving a player an opportunity to select a favorite character).

  FIG. 102 (D) is a diagram showing a time series of the character selection operation according to the fourth embodiment. In this example, the volume adjustment screen is displayed because the right button 192d of the cross key 192 is received during the display of the AT2 confirmation display screen. However, the input operation is received during the display of the volume adjustment screen. Therefore, the AT2 effect with the default character A has been started without displaying the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character).

<Specific example of character selection operation / Example of character selection by player's intention>
FIG. 103 (A) is a diagram showing a fifth example of the character selection operation in chronological order. In this example, since the operation of the push button 194 is received during the display of the AT2 confirmation display screen, the display of the character selection operation screen cd1 is started, and the right button of the cross key 192 is displayed while the character selection operation screen cd1 is displayed. Since 192d has been received, the volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed. Further, in this example, since the input operation is received during the display of the volume adjustment screen sd1, the character selection operation screen cd1 is redisplayed, and then, while the character selection operation screen cd1 is displayed, the input operation is received. However, the insertion operation is not received as a character determination operation (a character is not selected against the player's intention), and the display of the character selection operation screen cd1 is maintained.

  Then, when a pressing operation (lever operation) of the start lever 135 is received while the character selection operation screen cd1 is being displayed, a character that informs that the character to appear in the AT2 effect (character A in this example) has been determined. After displaying the determination screen ed1, the AT2 effect in which the character appears appears.

FIG. 103 (B) is a diagram showing a time-series example 6 of the character selection operation.
In this example, the flow from the display of the volume adjustment screen sd1 to the redisplay of the character selection operation screen cd1 is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 103A, but the flow of the character selection operation screen cd1 after the redisplay is performed. During the display, since the operation of the PUSH button 194, that is, the character determination operation has been received, the character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined as the character A provisionally selected on the character selection operation screen, and appears in the AT2 effect. After displaying the character determination screen ed1 notifying that the character (the character A in this example) has been determined, an AT2 effect in which the character appears has started.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 104A to 104C, the push button 194 is configured by a button that can emit light, and the push button 194 is configured to emit light when the character selection operation screen can be displayed. are doing.

FIG. 104 (A) is a diagram showing Example 6 of the character selection operation in time series.
In this example, during the display of the AT2 confirmation display screen, since the character selection operation screen can be displayed, the non-light-emitting PUSH button 194 which has been turned off is caused to emit light, and the operation of the PUSH button 194 (character selection operation) When the screen call operation is received, the display of the character selection operation screen is started. Also, since the character selection operation screen can be displayed even during the display of the character selection operation screen, when the push button 194 is made to emit light and the operation of the push button 194 (character determination operation) is received, The character appearing in the AT2 production is determined to be the character A temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen, and the AT2 production by the character A has been started. Also, during the AT2 effect, since the character selection operation screen cannot be displayed, the push button 194 is turned off.

FIG. 104 (B) is a diagram showing Example 7 of the character selection operation in time series.
In this example, during the display of the volume adjustment screen and the display of the demonstration screen, the character selection operation screen cannot be displayed, so the push button 194 is turned off. In this example, the volume adjustment end screen is displayed when the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received during the display of the volume adjustment screen. However, for example, a certain time (for example, 10 (Seconds) may have elapsed, the display of the volume adjustment end screen may be started.

FIG. 104 (C) is a diagram showing Example 8 of the character / selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, the flow up to the display of the volume adjustment end screen is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 104B, but when the operation of the push button 194 (not shown) is received, the AT2 confirmation display screen is displayed. Is displayed again, and since the character selection operation screen can be displayed during the display, the non-light emitting PUSH button 194, which has been turned off, is illuminated.

<Specific Example / Modified Example of Character Select Operation>
FIG. 105A is a diagram showing a modification 1 of the character selection operation in chronological order.
In this example, after the character selection operation screen is displayed, a selection decision effect of notifying information of the character selected in the character selection operation screen (in this example, character A) is performed. With such a configuration, the player can check whether or not the desired character has been selected before the effect is started, and the interest of the player may be increased.

FIG. 105 (B) is a diagram showing a modification 2 of the character selection operation in a time series.
In this example, the input operation was received while a screen other than the character selection operation screen was being displayed. Therefore, the default operation was performed without displaying the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character). Since the AT2 effect by the character A has been started, the selection determining effect is not performed. With such a configuration, even when the player is not given an opportunity to select a favorite character, discouragement of the player may be reduced.

  As described above, the game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the present invention 3-1”) has a display capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. A gaming machine provided with a means, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts an operation for a first determination (hereinafter, referred to as a “first display For example, the first display d1 shown in FIG. 106 and the character selection operation screen cd1) shown in FIG. 103 (A), and one of the plurality of types of display is an operation for the second determination. (Hereinafter, referred to as “second display”; for example, a second display d2 shown in FIG. 106 and a volume adjustment screen sd1 shown in FIG. 103A), and the first display is displayed. The first operation (for example, In addition to a certain operation h1 shown in FIG. 106, an input operation shown in FIG. 103 (A), an operation of a push button 194, an operation of a plurality of buttons provided on the cross key 192, and any of these operations When a plurality of operations are performed, a determination regarding the first determination (for example, selection of a character to appear in a certain effect) is configured to be executable, and in a state where the first display is displayed. The second display is configured to be able to start display, and the display is started after the first display is started and before the determination regarding the first determination is executed. In a state where the second display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “first state”), even if the first operation is performed, the determination regarding the first determination is not performed. Be that It is a game table for the butterflies. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 3-1.

  According to the gaming table according to the invention 3-1 of the present application, it is possible to carefully make a decision on the previous decision (decision on the first decision). In addition, after the second display, there is a possibility that the contents of the first display may be forgotten, and when the determination regarding the first display becomes unintended by the player (for example, when the game is started first, There is a case where the operation is inadvertently determined by an operation (medal insertion into the insertion slot, pressing of the insertion button), but such an unintended operation of the player is prevented, and loss of the player's motivation to play is prevented. Becomes possible.

  The gaming table according to Invention 3-1 of the present application is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the display of the second display ends when the first operation is performed in the first state, and the first operation is performed after the display of the second display ends, It may be configured such that the decision regarding the first decision is not executed.

  According to such a configuration, even after the display of the operation display for the subsequent determination is completed, the determination regarding the previous determination (the determination regarding the first determination) can be carefully performed. Because, after the second display, the content displayed earlier (the content of the first display) may be forgotten. For example, the determination operation regarding the second display and the determination regarding the first display may be performed. When the operations are the same, an unintended decision may be performed by repeatedly performing the decision operation (for example, a continuous hit operation). Further, even when the determination operation regarding the second display and the determination operation regarding the first display are not the same, it is not intended when the determination operation regarding the first display is inadvertently performed after the display of the second display. Decisions may be made. According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent such an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his / her motivation to play.

  Note that, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends, the first display is performed during the first display. May be configured such that the determination regarding the first determination is not performed even if the operation of (1) is performed.

  Further, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and even when the first operation is performed after the display of the second display is completed, the second operation is performed. Although the decision regarding one decision is not executed, when the second operation is performed, the decision regarding the first decision is configured to be executable, and the first operation and the second operation are different operations. There may be.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and make the decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision) carefully. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and to gain time, during which time the player can remind about the first display. In addition, since a decision on the previous decision (decision on the first decision) may be made by a lever operation following the throwing operation, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is accustomed to the game. it can. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his / her motivation to play.

  Note that, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends, the first display is performed during the first display. Is performed, the determination regarding the first determination is not performed. However, when a certain operation different from the first operation (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation”) is performed, the second determination is performed. A decision on one decision may be configured to be executable.

  In addition, an operation unit (for example, a PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 103B or the like) which may be used for an effect is provided, and when the operation unit is operated in a state where the first display is displayed. , The determination regarding the first determination is configured to be executable, the display of the second display ends when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display When the operation of the operation unit is performed after the termination, the determination regarding the first determination may be configured to be executable.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the determination regarding the first determination without depending on the display state by the operation means that may be used for the effect. In addition, since a stable decision can be made with the operation means that may be used for the production, it is possible to make a player who is not interested in the operation means pay attention to the operation means and enjoy the production. May be possible. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his / her motivation to play.

  The operation means that may be used for the performance may be an operation means capable of adjusting the volume of a sound output means (for example, a speaker) or a light output means (for example, an LED, a lamp, a liquid crystal display device). Operation means capable of adjusting the amount of light and adjusting the brightness may be used.

  In addition, one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display (for example, a screen indicating that the AT2 state has been determined), and the fourth display is displayed from the state in which the fourth display is displayed. It is configured to be able to shift to a state where one display is displayed, and when the first operation is performed in a state where the fourth display is displayed, a determination regarding the first determination can be executed May be configured.

  With such a configuration, the determination regarding the first determination can be smoothly performed. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth determination method to a player who is accustomed to a game. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his / her motivation to play.

  In the state where the fourth display is displayed, the display of the second display can be started, and the display of the first display is started after the display of the fourth display is started. When the first operation is performed in a state in which the second display whose display has been started before the display is performed, the determination regarding the first determination is executable even if the first operation is performed. Good.

  With such a configuration, the determination regarding the first determination can be smoothly performed. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth determination method to a player who is accustomed to a game. Further, a player who displays the second display without displaying the first display in a state where the first display can be displayed may not be interested in the determination regarding the first display, Such a player can be determined smoothly. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his / her motivation to play.

  In addition, a lottery process (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the role and determining the lottery result is provided, and the role is not dependent on the insertion of the game medium. In the state where it is not possible to start the execution of the replay, it is possible to display both the first display and the second display in a state where the replay can be performed. In a state where the execution of the replay can be started, only the first display of the first display and the second display may be displayed.

  In the state where the execution of the replay can be started and the first display is displayed, even if the first operation is performed, the determination regarding the first determination is not performed. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, in a state where the execution of the replay can be started and the fourth display is displayed, even if the first operation is performed, the determination regarding the first determination is not performed. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, an interlocking effect shown in FIG. 64), and the third display is a display including a plurality of scenes. The display of the plurality of scenes includes a display of a first scene and a display of a second scene, and the display of the first scene includes the display of the first scene in a state where the first display is displayed. The display is started when the operation is performed, and the display of the second scene is started when the first operation is performed in a state where the first display is not displayed. There may be a display in some cases.

  In addition, a first game (for example, a three-game bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number, and a second game (for example, two-game bet) in which the bet number of the game medium is a second number Game), the second number is different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. In the first state in the first game, the first operation in the first game, even if the first operation is performed, it is configured such that the determination regarding the first determination is not executed, the second game In the first state, the configuration may be such that, even if the first operation is performed, the determination regarding the first determination is not performed.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily know whether the first game or the second game is being played depending on whether or not the decision regarding the first decision is executed. In some cases, it may be possible to notice that the first game is a more advantageous game for the player than the second game.

  A game console (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the present invention 3-2”) includes display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. A game console, wherein the game console is a slot machine, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a display that prompts an operation for a first determination (hereinafter, referred to as a “first display”. 107, a first display d1 shown in FIG. 107, and a character selection operation screen cd1) shown in FIG. 103 (B), wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a display for prompting an operation for a second determination ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “second display.” For example, a second display d2 shown in FIG. 107 and a volume adjustment screen sd1) shown in FIG. Indication after the decision regarding the first decision ( Below, it is referred to as a “third display.” For example, in a state where the third display d3 shown in FIG. 107 and the character determination screen ed1) shown in FIG. The first operation (for example, an operation h1 shown in FIG. 107, an input operation shown in FIG. 103B, an operation of a push button 194, an operation of a plurality of buttons provided on the cross key 192, When a plurality of operations among these operations are performed, the third display is configured to be displayable, and the display of the second display can be started in a state where the first display is displayed. The state in which the second display is displayed after the first display is started to be displayed and before the third display is displayed ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “first state”. In, even if the first operation is performed, the third display is configured so that it does not appear, it is the amusement machine according to claim. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 3-2.

  According to the gaming table according to the invention 3-2 of the present application, it is possible to carefully make a decision on the previous decision (decision on the first decision). In addition, after the second display, there is a possibility that the contents of the first display may be forgotten, and when the determination regarding the first display becomes unintended by the player (for example, when the game is started first, There is a case where the operation is inadvertently determined by an operation (medal insertion into the insertion slot, pressing of the insertion button), but such an unintended operation of the player is prevented, and loss of the player's motivation to play is prevented. Becomes possible.

  The gaming table according to the present invention 3-2 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the display of the second display ends when the first operation is performed in the first state, and the first operation is performed after the display of the second display ends, The third display may not be displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even after the display of the operation display for the subsequent determination is completed, the determination regarding the previous determination (the determination regarding the first determination) can be carefully performed. Because, after the second display, the content displayed earlier (the content of the first display) may be forgotten. For example, the determination operation regarding the second display and the determination regarding the first display may be performed. When the operations are the same, an unintended decision may be performed by repeatedly performing the decision operation (for example, a continuous hit operation). Further, even when the determination operation regarding the second display and the determination operation regarding the first display are not the same, it is not intended when the determination operation regarding the first display is inadvertently performed after the display of the second display. Decisions may be made. According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent such an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his / her motivation to play.

  Note that, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends, the first display is performed during the first display. May be configured so that the third display is not displayed even if the operation described above is performed.

  Further, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and even when the first operation is performed after the display of the second display is completed, the second operation is performed. Although the third display is not displayed, the third display can be displayed when a certain operation different from the first operation (hereinafter, referred to as a “second operation”) is performed. Good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and make the decision regarding the previous decision (decision regarding the first decision) carefully. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and to gain time, during which time the player can be reminded of the first display. In addition, since a decision on the previous decision (decision on the first decision) may be made by a lever operation following the throwing operation, it is possible to provide a smooth decision method to a player who is accustomed to the game. it can. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his / her motivation to play.

  Note that, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends, the first display is performed during the first display. Is performed, the third display is not displayed. However, when a certain operation different from the first operation (hereinafter, referred to as “second operation”) is performed, the third display is displayed. The display may be configured to be displayable.

  In addition, an operation unit (for example, a PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 103B or the like) which may be used for an effect is provided, and when the operation unit is operated in a state where the first display is displayed. The third display is configured to be displayable, the display of the second display ends when the first operation is performed in the first state, after the display of the second display ends When the operation of the operation means is performed, the third display may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the determination regarding the first determination without depending on the display state by the operation means that may be used for the effect. In addition, since a stable decision can be made with the operation means that may be used for the production, it is possible to make a player who is not interested in the operation means pay attention to the operation means and enjoy the production. May be possible. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his / her motivation to play.

  The operation means that may be used for the performance may be an operation means capable of adjusting the volume of a sound output means (for example, a speaker) or a light output means (for example, an LED, a lamp, a liquid crystal display device). Operation means capable of adjusting the amount of light and adjusting the brightness may be used.

  In addition, one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display (for example, a screen indicating that the AT2 state has been determined), and the fourth display is displayed from the state in which the fourth display is displayed. It is configured to be able to shift to a state where one display is displayed, and when the first operation is performed in a state where the fourth display is displayed, the third display can be displayed. It may be.

  With such a configuration, the determination regarding the first determination can be smoothly performed. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth determination method to a player who is accustomed to a game. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his / her motivation to play.

  In the state where the fourth display is displayed, the display of the second display can be started, and the display of the first display is started after the display of the fourth display is started. The third display may be displayed when the first operation is performed in a state where the second display whose display has been started before the display is performed is performed.

  With such a configuration, the determination regarding the first determination can be smoothly performed. In addition, it is possible to provide a smooth determination method to a player who is accustomed to a game. Further, a player who displays the second display without displaying the first display in a state where the first display can be displayed may not be interested in the determination regarding the first display, Such a player can be determined smoothly. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unintended operation of the player and prevent the player from losing his / her motivation to play.

  In addition, a lottery process (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the role and determining the lottery result is provided, In the state where it is not possible to start the execution of the replay, it is possible to display both the first display and the second display in a state where the replay can be performed. In a state where the execution of the replay can be started, only the first display of the first display and the second display may be displayed.

  Further, in a state in which the execution of the replay can be started and the first display is displayed, even if the first operation is performed, the third display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Further, in a state in which the execution of the replay can be started and the fourth display is displayed, even if the first operation is performed, the third display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  In addition, one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display (for example, an interlocking effect shown in FIG. 64), and the fifth display is a display including a plurality of scenes. The display of the plurality of scenes includes a display of a first scene and a display of a second scene, and the display of the first scene includes the display of the first scene in a state where the first display is displayed. The display is started when the operation is performed, and the display of the second scene is started when the first operation is performed in a state where the first display is not displayed. There may be a display in some cases.

  In addition, a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number (hereinafter, referred to as a “first game”; for example, a three-page bet game), and a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (hereinafter, “first game”) , A “second game”. For example, the game is configured to be able to execute a two-game bet, and the second number is different from the first number. Also, the first game is an advantageous game for the player, and in the first state in the first game, even if the first operation is performed, the third display is not displayed In the first state of the second game, even if the first operation is performed, the third display may not be displayed.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily know whether the first game or the second game is being played depending on whether or not the decision regarding the first decision is executed. In some cases, it may be possible to notice that the first game is a more advantageous game for the player than the second game.

  In addition, during the AT2 state (or the AT1 state), an increase display of points (a display (a title or an item) according to an internal point may be performed) may be performed according to the small role. Further, the configuration may be such that the advantage in the judge state changes according to the value. Further, based on the points or the like accumulated by the player, a flurry effect may be performed in a game at the end of the AT2 state or the like to determine or inform the mode of the judge state.

  Further, in the case of the second game (game of hanging two cards), it may be configured so that points, items, and the like do not increase. In the case where a specific scene is not displayed (skipped) in the second game (two-sheet game), a flirting effect may not be displayed (skip).

  In addition, in a game console where the bonus symbols are aligned unless the symbols are avoided, the navigation navigation is performed in a displayable state (in the case of a small role that is not necessarily retracted except in the replay mode except in the replay mode). You may. In addition, when the symbols are aligned, a predetermined effect display is repeatedly performed (for example, the display of a still image is continued). May be displayed. Further, after the transition to the normal section (after the next game), the predetermined effect may be continuously performed.

  Further, the game may not shift to the advantageous section during the bonus, but may shift to the default screen in the normal gaming state after the bonus. Also, during the bonus, the game state may be shifted to a game state where only the second game (two betting games) is possible. That is, in a gaming table of a specification in which bonus symbols are prepared without avoiding symbols, only the second game (two-swing game) may be configured during the bonus. During the bonus, a game in which the difference is 0 between IN2 and OUT2 is performed over several tens of games, and the bonus may be terminated when the payout exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 60). .

  Further, even if the value of the high navigation state counter becomes 19 games remaining during the bonus of the two-slot game, the game may not be shifted to the LMT state. Further, the ED effect may be started (or the ED effect is not performed) without shifting to the LMT state. Further, for example, when the bonus is completed before the remaining game number becomes zero, the game may be able to shift to the LMT state thereafter (or may always shift to the LMT state, or may shift to the LMT state). May be present). Further, even after shifting to the low navigation state due to the arrival of the limiter during the bonus, the second game (two-slot game) is forced, and the high navigation state is not shifted during the game. Good.

  Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed in the game machine are used in a circulating manner. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured as one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to enable two-way communication. Good. Further, while the main control unit and the first sub-control unit enable bidirectional communication, the communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely enumerate the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, among a plurality of configurations described in the first to third embodiments, by applying the content described in one configuration to another configuration, the width of the game may be further expanded.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine represented by a ball-and-ball game machine (pachinko machine), a torso gaming machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine or a medalless slot machine. it can.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Symbol display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Staging image display device 192 Cross key 194 PUSH button 300 Main control unit 400 First sub-control unit 500 Second sub-control Department

Claims (2)

Operating means;
Control means for shifting to any one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
A gaming table with
It is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means,
The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to notification of the operation information (hereinafter, referred to as “operation navigation”) ,
The operation navigation is a navigation about a pressing role,
A first counter for the advantageous state,
Each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, referred to as “first count value”) can be updated,
When one end condition of a plurality of end conditions including the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied, it is configured to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state,
Wherein the first end condition is satisfied possible conditions when the first count is equal to the first specific value,
In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any of a plurality of advantageous game states,
One advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state,
The first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed,
A second counter for the first advantageous gaming state,
Each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter, referred to as “second count value”) can be updated,
Even in the case where a game that has not been won in the pushing order in the first advantageous gaming state is performed, the second count value is configured to be updateable,
The first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number, and the second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number, are configured to be executable,
The second number is a number different from the first number,
In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”).
One of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”).
One of the plurality of types of display is a specific display (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”) different from any of the first display and the second display.
The certain value is a value related to the second count value,
After the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, when the execution of the first game is started, when both the first count value and the second count value are displayed. The count value is updated, and the second display can be displayed in the first game,
When the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous game state, the first count value and the second count value Only the first count value is updated, the second display is not displayed in the second game, the third display is configured to be displayable,
A third counter that counts the total number of game media that the player has acquired, based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state,
Each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the third counter (hereinafter, referred to as “third count value”) can be updated,
The second end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value,
Regardless of whether the first game or the second game is executed in the advantageous state, the third count value is configured to be updated based on the result of the game. ,
One of the plurality of types of display is a start display of a certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth display”).
When the execution of the first game is started in a certain state in the first advantageous game state, the fourth display is configured to be able to be displayed in the first game,
When the execution of the second game is started in the certain state, the fourth display is not displayed in the second game.
A gaming table characterized by the following. Operating means;
Game state setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state,
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
Notifying means capable of notifying operation information of the operating means,
A gaming table with
Advantageous game state control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state,
A plurality of counters including a first counter, a second counter, and a third counter for the advantageous state;
Bet number setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of bet numbers including a first bet number and a second bet number smaller than the first bet number to start one game When,
With
The advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to notification of the operation information (hereinafter, referred to as “operation navigation”),
The operation navigation is a navigation about a pressing role,
In the advantageous state, the game with the first bet number (hereinafter, referred to as “first game”) is more gaming than the game with the second bet number (hereinafter, referred to as “second game”). Is an advantageous game for the
The advantageous gaming state control means, said each time 1 game in an advantageous state is performed, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, "first count value" hereinafter.) Feasible means to control for updating the And
The game state setting means ends the setting of the advantageous state and sets the normal state when one of a plurality of end conditions including a first end condition and a second end condition is satisfied. Configurable means,
The first termination condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value has become a first specific value,
The advantageous game state control means,
In the advantageous state, it is possible to execute control to set any one of a plurality of advantageous game states including the first advantageous game state,
Means for executing control for updating the count value of the second counter (hereinafter, referred to as “second count value”) every time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state;
The first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed,
Even in the case where a game that has not been won in the pushing order in the first advantageous gaming state is performed, the second count value is configured to be updateable,
The display means may include, as one of the plurality of types of display, a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter, referred to as a “first display”), and a value after updating the certain value. A display including an image to be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”), a specific display different from any of the first display and the second display (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”). , And a start display of a certain effect (hereinafter, referred to as “fourth display”).
The certain value is a value related to the second count value,
After the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state,
When the execution of the first game is started, both the first count value and the second count value are updated by the advantageous game state control means, and in the first game, The second display is configured to be displayable by the display means,
When the execution of the second game is started, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated by the advantageous game state control means, In the second game, the third display is configured to be able to be displayed without displaying the second display by the display means,
The third counter is a counter that counts the total number of game media obtained by the player based on the number of game media used and the number of game media paid out in the advantageous state,
The advantageous game state control means is means capable of executing control for updating a count value of the third counter (hereinafter, referred to as “third count value”) every time one game is played in the advantageous state. Yes,
The second end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the third count value reaches a second specific value,
The advantageous game state control means is configured to execute the third count value based on a result of the game regardless of whether the first game or the second game is executed in the advantageous state. Means that can execute control for updating
The display means,
When the execution of the first game is started in a certain state in the first advantageous game state, the fourth display can be displayed in the first game,
When the execution of the second game is started in the certain state, the second display is a unit that does not display the fourth display in the second game,
A gaming table characterized by the following.